RAVASI
RAVASI
RAVASI
TER
About us page 5
Victor page 17
Mike page 41
NPA page 59
Charlie page 77
SPA page 87
Alpha page 103
Mike-D page 115
NPA-CP page 123
3 JOYSTICKS
7 FOOTSWITCHES
8 ELECTRONIC DEVICES
9 ATEX SERIES
APPENDIX - REGULATIONS
Appendix - Regulations page 423
3
4
HISTORY
T
ER Tecno Elettrica Ravasi srl was established in In 1987, TER set up an in-house lab for product testing and
Olgiate Molgora (Lecco), in 1962, the brainchild of in 1993 it was the irst Italian company to obtain the ISO
its founder, Sergio Blasi, who saw the possibility of 9001 certiication from the Dutch certiication company
successfully entering the ield of switches and controls KEMA.
for industrial hoisting machines.
New headquarters were opened in Calco (Lecco) in 2007
Growth was fast from the start, favoured by the phase of and in 2017 TER celebrated its irst ifty-ive years of
industrialization under way in Italy. From the early 70s, industrial history, looking to the future and to new market
TER started a process of internationalization, with the irst challenges.
export sales to the Spanish market.
At the beginning of 2018 TER’s Quality Management
TER’s gradual expansion in various markets around the System is updated according to the new UNI ISO 9001:
world was combined with increasing diversiication of 2015 standard.
its product range linked to the search for new business
The last two years have been focused in particular on
sectors, including, already in the mid 80s, the wind energy
the development and launch on the market of various
industry.
new products, in which electronics plays an increasingly
Over the years, TER focused its strategy on the creation important role.
of innovative, reliable products that could anticipate
demands from the market. To this end, it started
combining mechanical technology with electronics in
some of its products.
Foundation of
Shilectric, now
Ravasi Iberica, Set up of in-house Presentation of
and irst export New Company
1970 (Spain) 1987 laboratory for
product tests 1999 “Charlie”, “Best
selling product” 2007 Headquarters 2019 New electronic
products
5
MARKETING
T
ER’s aim is to simplify the control of the machines Commercial relations with customers are supported
equipped with its devices, designing reliable, by a well-structured back ofice and by the wealth of
ergonomic and intuitive safety products, capable technical and sales documentation available through
of predicting the demands of the market and becoming the company’s website, which also includes a new
the industry benchmark. e-commerce area. Over the last year TER has introduced
the new and easier domain ter.it, which can be used both
At the basis of this company mission is the will to
for website and e-mail boxes.
establish a connection between market and company,
by giving an increasingly central role to the sales Since 2012, orders have been managed by means of
department, seen as a continuous relationship between conigurators, also accessible through the web, created
TER and its customers. to enable TER’s back ofice staff to choose the product
options requested by the customers and to summarize
TER exports to 88 countries around the world and
them in an item code preventing the entry of incongruent
manages its customers through a network of agents and
or infeasible features.
19 distributors.
19 Distributors
88 Countries
6
www.ter.it
TECHNOLOGY
T
ER products are the result of capacity for innovation, moulding and associated processes, thanks to the
experience and application of technological experience acquired in the 70s, when a plastic moulding
expertise. Over the years, the company has stood plant was opened.
up to competitors by researching new solutions, new
In the early 90s, TER introduced the use of 3D modelling in
materials and shapes, developing new skills and inding
the design process and started a progressive integration
new applications for its products.
of electronics in its products.
The quality standard of TER products stems from
In the last two years electronics has taken a more and
a thorough knowledge of the materials used and
more important role leading to the design of a new and
from a constant attention to technical, construction,
innovative line of electronic products, including a series
performance, quality and ergonomic aspects.
of limit switches, encoders and transducers.
TER has gained extensive expertise in the area of plastic
7
PRODUCTION
T 9
ER acknowledges the central importance of the
production process to achieve quality products Product
that meet the needs of its customers. families
From order reception in the Sales Department through
to shipment, each step is organized by process, in order
to respect delivery times, ensure product traceability
and carry out all the required conformity checks during
the phases of material reception, assembly and inal
inspection.
For the sake of protection of quality, all TER products
Product
are “Made in Italy” and production has always been
concentrated in Italy, to guarantee excellence of materials
40952 configurations
and greater controls on products and components.
8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
SO 9001 certiied since 1993, TER’s Quality Management TER has obtained cULus product certiication for the US
System is now based on processes according to UNI and Canadian markets, and EAC for the Russian market.
ISO 9001: 2015, ensuring coordination of all company
TER has also carried out a careful hazard analysis to
activities, from design to production organization,
certify its products at the irst safety integrity level SIL 1
from purchases to sales, from after-sales support to
according to Standard IEC 61508.
dimensional and functional checks of samples and
products.
C
X
SIL1
9
TEST LABORATORY
S
ince 1987, TER has been running an in-house • IP code - protection degree
Test Lab, designed to test the operating safety of • IK code - protection degree
the products and guarantee conformity with the • Electrical life
different regulations that apply to the electromechanical • Electrical heating
industry. • Electrical properties
TER’s Test Lab is equipped with all the instruments • Making and breaking capacity under normal and
needed to carry out electrical, mechanical and climatic abnormal conditions
tests on the products: • Short-circuit test
TEST Mechanical
duration
TEST
LABORATORY
Electrical TEST
duration
TEST Climate
10
Some TER products have also successfully
undergone the HALT Test (Highly Accelerated Life
Test) in external certified laboratories. Temperature HALT TEST
Step Stresses Phase 1
In some cases, when evaluating the technological
potential of new products to be introduced on the
market, additional tests are carried out on top of
the ones required by regulations. Upon customer’s
request, Test Lab staff are available to carry out Temperature HALT TEST
Ramps Phase 2
more complex, in-depth measurements.
11
REFERENCES
12
13
14
WALL-MOUNTED
CONTROL STATIONS 1
15
16
VICTOR
VICTOR
Wall-mounted control station 1
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
visual perception of the activated function.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with
• Available with labels (symbols and lettering) to be applied
standard ISO 13850.
next to the actuators, or with pushbuttons with two-colour
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions.
moulded permanent symbols.
• Mechanical life of pushbuttons and switches: 10 million
operations.
• IP protection degree: Victor 1-2-3-4 actuators is classiied CERTIFICATIONS
IP66, IP67 and IP69K; Victor 6-8 actuators is classiied IP65.
• NEMA protection degree: Victor 1-2-3-4 actuators is • CE marking, cULus* marking and EAC certiication.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
classiied Type 1, 4 and 4X. • Victor is available, upon request, with the SIL1 certiication
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C. (Safety Integrity Level 1), according to Standard IEC 61508.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and • Complying with accident prevention regulation BGV C 1 (only
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust. for Germany).
• HALT TEST (Highly Accelerated Life Test) passed, simulating
conditions largely exceeding standard operating conditions.
OPTIONS
• Available in coniguration from 1 to 8 actuators. Use the online conigurator (https://coniguratore.terworld.com)
• Cable clamp can be installed at the top, at the bottom or on or ill in the “request form” for accurate product coniguration.
the back of the control station.
• Available with magnetic mounting case to make the control
station even more versatile.
• 1NO or 1NC switches, LEDs voltage 24/48 Vac/dc or
110/230 Vac and potentiometers.
• Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
opposite functions.
* Not available on all versions.
17
VICTOR
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
Victor 1-2-3-4 actuators IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
IP protection degree
Victor 6-8 actuators IP 65
NEMA protection degree Victor 1-2-3-4 actuators Type 1, 4 and 4X
Insulation category Class II
Cable entry Cable clamp M20 x 1.5
Operating positions Any position
1 speed pushbutton: 10x106 operations
Mechanical life 2 speed pushbutton: 10x106 operations
Illuminated pushbutton: 10x106 operations
18
VICTOR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
13 11
Scheme
14 12
Scheme
LED
X2
19
VICTOR
74.8
61.9
56 74.8
19.5
Ø4.5 28 61.9
1
17.5
14.2
38
A
17.5
Ø4
28 72.7
.5
56
14.2
A
17.5
73.7 72.7
85
Dimensions (mm)
No. of actuators
A
1 72.9
2 122
3 152
4 182
6 242
8 302
Actuators
Key selector switches Selector switches Key mushroom Mushroom Potentiometer
pushbutton pushbutton Ø 40 mm
21
81.6 46.8
20
VICTOR
EMPTY CONTROL STATIONS
Cover color
No. of buttons Code
Grey Yellow Black
X F71EG00000000001
1 X F71EY00000000001
X F71EB00000000001 1
X F71FG00000000001
2 X F71FY00000000001
X F71FB00000000001
X F71GG00000000001
3 X F71GY00000000001
X F71GB00000000001
X F71HG00000000001
X F71HB00000000001
X F71IG00000000001
X F71IB00000000001
X F71JG00000000001
X F71JB00000000001
21
VICTOR
1 actuator
Cover color
Type of actuator Code
1 Grey Yellow Black
Latched mushroom pushbutton X F71EG10000000001
PRSL1801PI switch 1NC
11
X F71EY10000000001
12 X F71EB10000000001
Key mushroom pushbutton X F71EG10000000007
PRSL1801PI switch 1NC
11
X F71EY10000000002
12 X F71EB10000000008
Impulse mushroom pushbutton X F71EG10000000022
PRSL1801PI switch 1NC
11
X F71EY10000000003
12 X F71EB10000000009
2 position selector switch X F71EG00000001001
PRSL1800PI switch 1NO
13
X F71EY00000001006
14 X F71EB00000001007
3 position selector switch X F71EG00000001012
No.2 PRSL1800PI switches 1NO+1NO
13 13
X F71EY00000001007
14 14 X F71EB00000001008
2 actuators
Cover color
Type of actuator Code
Grey Yellow Black
Latched mushroom pushbutton Start button X F71FG11000000001
PRSL1801PI switch 1NC PRSL1800PI switch 1NO
11 13
X F71FY11000000001
12 14
X F71FB11000000001
12 14
X F71FB11000000002
14 14
X F71FB00020000001
22
VICTOR
3 actuators
Cover color
Type of actuator Code
Grey Yellow Black 1
Latched mushroom White button Black button
pushbutton PRSL1800PI switch PRSL1800PI switch X F71GG10020000001
PRSL1801PI switch 1NC 1NO 1NO
11 13 13
X F71GY10020000001
12 14 14 X F71GB10020000001
12 14 14 X F71GB10020000002
14 14 14 X F71GB00020001004
14 14 14 14 X F71GB00020001005
23
VICTOR
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
2-8 actuators
A2
1 A1
A3
A25
A25
A26
A4
A17
A5 A26
A6
A18
A7
A19
A16
A8
A20
A9 A25
A24
A21
A10 A26
A22
A11 A26
A23
A12
A25
A13
A14
A15
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Potentiometers”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom
pushbuttons”, “Key selector switches”, “Selector switches” and Accessories”.
24
VICTOR
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
1 actuator
A4 1
A3
A1
A5
A25
A25
A6 A26
A7
A25
A26
A28
A8 A24
A20
A9 A21
A22
A27 A16
A23 A25
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Potentiometers”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom
pushbuttons”, “Key selector switches”, “Selector switches” and Accessories”.
25
VICTOR
COMPONENTS
Switches
11
X1
A22
X1
Potentiometers
Potentiometer 1 kΩ PRSL1893PI
Actuators
PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
A1 Disk for pushbutton See disk table
26
VICTOR
Pilot lights
Mushroom pushbuttons
Red PRSL1885ROC
Blue PRSL1885BLC
Red PRSL1882PI
A27 Rectangular mushroom pushbutton
(available only for Victor with 1 actuator)
Black PRSL1882NEC
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
X 0 PRSL1867PI
0/1
X 0 PRSL1868PI
X 0 PRSL1869PI
1/0/2
X 0 PRSL1870PI
X 0 PRSL1871PI
A12 0/1/1+2
X 0 PRSL1872PI
X 1 PRSL1873PI
1/2 change-over
X 1 PRSL1874PI
X 1+2 PRSL1875PI
1/1+2/2
X 1+2 PRSL1876PI
27
VICTOR
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1855BI
Green PRSL1855VE
1 0/1 Blue PRSL1855BL
Spring return Red PRSL1855RO
Yellow PRSL1855GI
Orange PRSL1855AR
White PRSL1856BI
Green PRSL1856VE
28
VICTOR
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1863BI
Green PRSL1863VE
29
VICTOR
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1861BI
Green PRSL1861VE
1 1/2 Blue PRSL1861BL
Spring return Red PRSL1861RO
Yellow PRSL1861GI
Orange PRSL1861AR
White PRSL1862BI
Green PRSL1862VE
Accessories
30
VICTOR
Accessories
PRTA001MPI PRTA002MPI PRTA003MPI PRTA004MPI PRTA005MPI PRTA006MPI PRTA007MPI PRTA008MPI PRTA011MPI PRTA012MPI
GREEN
PRTA015MPI PRTA016MPI PRTA018MPI PRTA019MPI PRTA022MPI PRTA023MPI PRTA026MPI PRTA027MPI PRTA032MPI PRTA033MPI
RED BLUE YELLOW GREY YELLOW WHITE BLACK GREEN
OPEN CLOSE
PRTA034MPI PRTA035MPI PRTA036MPI PRTA005MGR PRTA037MPI PRTA038MPI PRTA097MPI PRTA098MPI PRTA099MPI PRTA096MPI
RED BLUE ORANGE
Transparent disks
YELLOW WHITE GREEN RED BLUE ORANGE
31
VICTOR
START ALARM RESET ALARM RESET STOP LIGHT RESET LINE STOP LINE START STOP BUCKET
BUCKET
UP LIFTING DOWN LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING UP AUXIL. DOWN AUXIL UP MAIN DOWN MAIN UP FAST MAIN DOWN FAST
FAST FAST 2ND SPEED 3RDSPEED LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING MAIN LIFTING
UP AUXIL. DOWN AUXIL. UP MAIN DOWN MAIN UP WINCH DOWN WINCH UP FAST DOWN FAST
UP WINCH DOWN WINCH
LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. 1-2 SPEED 1-2 SPEED WINCH WINCH
UP SLOW DOWN SLOW UP FAST RIGHT DOWN FAST UP SLOW UP FAST DOWN FAST UP HOIST
UP HOIST DOWN HOIST
RIGHT WINCH RIGHT WINCH WINCH RIGHT WINCH LEFT WINCH LEFT WINCH LEFT WINCH 1-2 SPEED
DOWN HOIST UP FAST DOWN FAST FORWARD BACKWARD FORWARD BACKWARD FORWARD
FORWARD BACKWARD
1-2 SPEED HOIST HOIST TROLLEY TROLLEY FAST TROLLEY FAST TROLLEY TROLLEY 1-2 S.
LEFT FAST RIGHT FAST LEFT TROLLEY RIGHT TROLLEY LEFT RIGHT LEFT FAST
RIGHT LEFT TROLLEY RIGHT TROLLEY
TROLLEY TROLLEY 1-2 S. 1-2 S. BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE
DOWN SLOW RIGHT FAST LEFT BRIDGE RIGHT BRIDGE CCW FAST CW FAST CCW ROTATION CW ROTATION
CCW ROTATION CW ROTATION
LEFT WINCH BRIDGE 1-2 S. 1-2 S. ROTATION ROTATION 1-2 S. 1-2 S.
ENERGIZE
CLOSE DOOR SPEED UP SPEED DOWN RAISE LOWER LOAD DOWNLOAD ENERGIZE DE-ENERGIZE
MAGNET
DE-ENERGIZE
APPROACH CONSENT AUTOMATIC MANUAL MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNET
32
VICTOR
Label sheet - Italian
SALITA DISCESA SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL.
FRENO RITORNO SALITA DISCESA
SOLLEV. SOLLEV. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 3a VEL. 3a VEL.
SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. 2a VELOCITÀ 3a VELOCITÀ SALITA SOLL. DISCES SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL.
VEL. VEL. SOLLEV. SOLLEV. AUSILIARIO AUSILIARIO PRINCIPALE PRINCIPALE PRINCIP. VEL. PRINCIP. VEL.
SALITA AUSIL. DISCESA AUSIL. SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA
1
1-2 V. 1-2 V. PRINCIP. 1-2 V. PRINCIP. 1-2 V. ARGANO ARGANO ARGANO 1-2 V. ARGANO 1-2 V. ARGANO VEL. ARGANO VEL.
ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO SIN ARGANO SIN ARGANO SIN SALITA DISCESA SALITA PAR.
SALITA LENTA DISC. LENTA SALITA VEL. DISCESA VEL. SALITA LENTA SALITA VEL. DISCESA VEL. PARANCO PARANCO 1-2 V.
DISCESA PAR. SALITA PAR. DISCESA PAR. AVANTI INDIETRO AVANTI CARR. INDIETRO AVANTI CARR.
AVANTI INDIETRO
1-2 V. VEL. VEL. CARRELLO CARRELLO VEL. CARR. VEL. 1-2 V.
INDIETRO CARR. AVANTI INDIETRO AVANTI PONTE INDIETRO AVANTI PONTE INDIETRO AVANTI INDIETRO
SINISTRA
1-2 V. PONTE PONTE VEL. PONTE VEL. 1-2 V. PONTE 1-2 V. TRASLAZIONE TRASLAZIONE
SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA DESTRA CARR. SINISTRA DESTRA CARR. SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA
DESTRA
CARRELLO CARRELLO CARR. VEL. VEL. CARR. 1-2 V. 1-2 V. PONTE PONTE PONTE VEL.
ARGANO SIN DESTRA PONTE SINISTRA DESTRA PONTE SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA DESTRA ROTAZ. SINISTRA DESTRA ROTAZ.
DISC. LENTA VEL. PONTE 1-2 V. 1-2 V. ROTAZIONE ROTAZIONE ROTAZ. VEL. VEL. ROTAZ. 1-2 V. 1-2 V.
CHIUSURA ECCITA
ACCELERA DECELERA ALZA ABBASSA CARICO SCARICO ECCITA DISECCITA
PORTELLO MAGNETE
DISECCITA
ACCOSTA CONSENSO AUTOMATICO MANUALE MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNETE
MARCHE MARCHE
MARCHE ALARME RESET ARRET LUMIERE MARCHE LIGNE ARRET LIGNE ARRET BENNE
ALARME BENNE
MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV.
FREIN RETOUR MONTEE DESCENTE
LEVAGE LEVAGE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. 3EME VIT. 3EME VIT.
MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV.
VITE VITE 2EME VIT. 3EME VIT. AUXILIAIRE AUXILIAIRE PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL PRINC. VITE PRINC. VITE
MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE DESCENTE
AUX. 1-2 VIT. AUX. 1-2 VIT. PRINC. 1-2 VIT. PRINC. 1-2 VIT. TREUIL TREUIL TREUIL 1-2 VIT. TREUIL 1-2 VIT. TREUIL VITE TREUIL VITE
TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL AUCHE TREUIL AUCHE TREUIL AUCHE MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE PALAN
MONTEE LENTE DESC. LENTE MONTEE VITE DESCENTE VITE MONTEE LENTE MONTEE VITE DESCENTE VITE PALAN PALAN 1-2 VIT.
DESC. PALAN MONTEE DESCENTE AVANT ARRIERE AVANT ARRIERE AVANT CHARIOT
AVANT ARRIERE
1-2 VIT. PALAN VITE PALAN VITE CHARIOT CHARIOT CHARIOT VITE CHARIOT VITE 1-2 VIT.
ARR. CHARIOT AVANT ARRIERE AVANT PONT ARRIERE PONT AVANT PONT ARRIERE PONT AVANT ARRIERE
GAUCHE
1-2 VIT. PONT PONT VITE VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. TRANSLATION TRANSLATION
TREUIL GAUCHE DROITE PONT GAUCHE PONT DROITE PONT GAUCHE DROITE GAUCHE DROITE GAUCHE ROT. DROITE ROT.
DESC. LENTE VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. ROTATION ROTATION ROTATION VITE ROTATION VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT.
GAUCHE ROT. DROITE ROT. GAUCHE BOITE DROITE BOITE CHARIOT CHARIOT
LENT VITE VITE CHARIOT VITE PONT
3EME VIT. 3EME VIT. A BOUTONS A BOUTONS GAUCHE DROITE
ACCOUPLEMNT.
VITE LEVAGE VITE ROTATION OUVRE FERME OUVRE PINCE FERME PINCE OUVRE BENNE FERME BENNE OUVRE PORTAIL
TREUIL
FERME PORTAIL ACCELERATION DECELERATION HISSER ABAISSER CHARGE DECHARGE EXCITER DESEXCITER MAGNETISE
33
VICTOR
HUB SCHNELL HUB RUNTER 2. GANG 3. GANG HILFSHUB HILFSHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB
1 RAUF SCHNELL
HAUPTHUB
HEBEN
HAUPTHUB
RAUF
WINDE
RUNTER
WINDE
RAUF
WINDE RAUF
RUNTER
WINDE RUNTER
RAUF SCH.
WINDE RAUF
RUNTER SCH.
WINDE RUNTER
RUNTER
1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG
RAUF RUNTER 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG SCHNELL SCHNELL
WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE LINKS WINDE LINKS WINDE LINKS FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG
LANGS. HOCH LANGS. RUNTER SCHNELL RAUF SCHNELL RUNTER LANGSAM RAUF SCHNELL RAUF SCHNELL RUNTER HOCH RUNTER HOCH 1.-2. GANG
LAUFKATZ LAUFKATZE
FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG LAUFKATZE LAUFKATZE LAUFKATZE
VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS
RUNTER 1.-2. GANG HOCH SCHNELL RUNTER SCHNELL VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS SCHNELL SCHNELL
VORW. 1.-2. GANG
WINDE LINKS KRANBRÜCKE KRANBRÜCKE KRANBRÜCKE DREHUNG DREHUNG DREHUNG LINKS DREHUNG RECHTS DREHUNG LINKS DREHUNG RECHTS
LANGSAM RUNTER RECHTS SCHNELL LINKS 1.-2. GANG RECHTS 1.-2. GANG LINKS RECHTS SCHNELL SCHNELL 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG
DECKELVERSCHLUSS BESCHLEUNIGEN VERZÖGERN ANHEBEN ABSENKEN LADUNG ABLADEN ERREGEN ABERREGEN MAGNETISIERUNG
REIN RAUS NORD SÜD OST WEST UBERBELASTUNG TARA 1-1+2-2 1-2-1+2
SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV.
FRENO RETORNO SUBIR BAJAR
ELEVACION ELEVACION 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 3ª VEL. 3ª VEL.
SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. 2ª VEL. 3ª VEL. SUBIR AUX. BAJAR AUX. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV.
RAPIDA RAPIDA ELEVACION ELEVACION ELEVACION ELEVACION PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL PRINC. RAPIDA PRINC. RAPIDA
SUBIR AUX. BAJAR AUX. SUBIR PRINC. BAJAR PRINC. SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR POLIP. BAJAR POLIP. SUBIR POLIP. BAJAR POLIP.
1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. POLIPASTO POLIPASTO 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. RAPIDO RAPIDO
POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. IZQ. POLIP. IZQ. POLIP. IZQ. SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR GANCHO
SUBIR LENTO BAJAR LENTO SUBIR RAPIDO BAJAR RAPIDO SUBIR LENTO SUBIR RAPIDO BAJAR RAPIDO GANCHO GANCHO 1-2 VEL.
BAJAR GANCHO SUBIR GANCHO BAJAR GANCHO ADELANTE ATRAS ADELANTE ATRAS CARR. ADELANTE
ADELANTE ATRAS
1-2 VEL. RAPIDO RAPIDO CARRITO CARRITO CARR. RAPIDO RAPIDO CARR. 1-2 VEL.
ATRAS CARR. ADELANTE ATRAS ADELANTE ATRAS PUENTE ADELANTE ATRAS PUENTE ADELANTE ATRAS
IZQUIERDA
1-2 VEL. PUENTE PUENTE PUENTE RAPIDO RAPIDO PUENTE 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. TRASLACION TRASLACION
POLIP. IZQUIER. DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA ROT. IZQUIERDA DERECHA ROT.
BAJAR LENTO PUENTE RAPIDO PUENTE 1-2 VEL. PUENTE 1-2VEL. ROTACION ROTACION ROT. RAPIDA RAPIDA ROT. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL.
CERRAR IMANTAR
ACELERAR DESACELERAR ELEVAR DESCENDER CARGAR DESCARGAR IMANTAR DESIMANTAR
PUERTA MAGNETO
DESIMANTAR
ACERCAR CONFIRMAR AUTOMATICO MANUAL MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNETO
34
VICTOR
VICTOR - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD CONTROL STATION
VICTOR 1
VICTOR 2
VICTOR 3
VICTOR 4
VICTOR 6
VICTOR 8
Instructions
(See next page for list of components and legends)
1 2 3 5
Fill in the chart to the left according to the number of control
Potentiometers
and LEDs
Switches
mushrooms,
elements required. Control stations are available with 1-2-3-4-
1
pilot lights
selectors,
elements
Color of
6-8 control elements.
Control
Button
disks
1 Control elements: enter the number corresponding to the
control element required ( 1 to 39 ) according to the legend.
4
Eg. 25
ATTENTION: the rectangular mushroom pushbutton ( 10 - 11 )
is available only for Victor with 1 actuator.
6 MI LA
2 Button disks: for pushbuttons ( 1 to 3 ) enter the number
corresponding to the disk required ( 50 to 88 ) according to
the legend. Both full color disks and transparent disks (for
illuminated buttons) are available. Eg. 57
11 cULus certiied: tick the box if you require cULus certiied units.
Not available on Victor with 6-8 actuators.
Cable clamp: the control stations are supplied with one cable
clamp M20 x 1.5 and washer for assembling. The cable clamp
can be mounted in various positions.
Cover 7 SIL 1 certiied 8
Grey Black Yellow
35
VICTOR
1 speed pushbutton It is possible to mount only 2 switches for each selector. pos 1
1 In the middle it is possible to mount only the LED for 0/1
with disk speed 1 30 spring return NA
1 speed black speed 1 illuminated selector switches. pos 1
25 pushbutton
SWITCH
ACTIVATION*
key out in position 0
speed 1
26 1 speed grey 0/1 pos 1
pushbutton pos 1
15 0/1 31 maintained positions NA
2 speed pushbutton spring return key out in position 0 pos 1
2 with disk pos 1
speed 1
1/0/2 pos 1
27 2 speed black speed 1 pos 1
pushbutton speed 2 0/1 32 spring return NA
16 key out in position 0 pos 2
28 2 speed grey maintained positions pos 1
pushbutton
1/0/2 pos 1
1 speed illuminated speed 1 pos 1 maintained positions NA
17 1/0/2 33
3 pushbutton LED spring return key out in position 0 pos 2
with disk speed 1 pos 2
0/1/1+2 pos 1+2
pos 1 34 spring return NA
1/0/2
Mushroom pushbuttons 18
maintained positions key out in position 0 pos 1 and 1+2
pos 2
All mushroom pushbuttons activate all pos 1+2
the switches at the same time. 0/1/1+2
pos 1 and 1+2 35 maintained positions
Latched mushroom pushbutton 19 1/1+2/2 NA
4 spring return key out in position 0 pos 1 and 1+2
for emergency stop pos 2 and 1+2
Latched mushroom pushbutton 1/2 change over pos 1
5 pos 1 and 1+2 spring return
for emergency stop Ø 40 mm 20 1/1+2/2 36 NA
maintained positions key out in position 1 pos 2
pos 2 and 1+2
6 Key mushroom pushbutton 1/2 change over pos 1
0/1/1+2 pos 1+2 maintained positions NA
Impulse mushroom pushbutton 21 37
spring return key out in positione 1 pos 2
7 Ø 33 mm with black base pos 1 and 1+2
pos 1+2 1/1+2/2 pos 1 and 1+2
8 Impulse black mushroom 22 0/1/1+2 38 spring return NA
pushbutton Ø 40 mm with yellow maintained positions key out in position 1+2 pos 2 and 1+2
pos 1 and 1+2
base
1/1+2/2 pos 1 and 1+2
9 Impulse black mushroom pos 1
39 maintained positions
pushbutton Ø 40 mm with yellow 23 1/2 NA
base and protective cap spring return pos 2 key out in position 1+2 pos 2 and 1+2
Full color and symbol disks for pushbuttons (ref. 1 and 2 ) Transparent disks for
GREEN RED RED illuminated pushbuttons (ref. 3 )
50 55 60 65 70 75 CLOSE 80 YELLOW WHITE GREEN
RED
83 85 87
BLUE YELLOW BLUE
53 58 63 68 73 78
5 Legend - Switches,
LEDs, potentiometers
GREEN GREEN
54 59 64 69 74 OPEN 79
90 PRSL1800PI - Switch 1NO
3 Legend - Color of selector switches, mushroom pushbuttons, pilot lights 91 PRSL1801PI - Switch 1NC
36
VICTOR
REMARKS
37
38
PENDANT CONTROL
STATIONS 2
39
40
MIKE
MIKE
Pendant control station 2
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
are separated from the actuators, mounted on the cover.
impulse or latched mushroom pushbuttons with rotation or
• Innovative suspension system with concealed cables to
key-operated release.
enable rapid, correct, ergonomic installation.
• One speed pushbuttons and selector switches available in
• Rubber pushbuttons with symbol disks to ensure protection
illuminated version in a range of colours.
against dust and prevent jamming when the control station
• Latched on-off maintained pushbutton to give an effective
is used in harsh environments.
visual perception of the activated function.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with
• Available with labels (symbols and lettering) to be applied
standard ISO 13850.
next to the actuators or with pushbuttons with two-colour
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
41
MIKE
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 66 / IP 67 / IP 69K
IK protection degree IK 08
NEMA protection degree Type 1, 4 and 4X
Insulation category Class II
Rubber cable sleeve (Ø 8÷26 mm)
Cable entry
Cable clamp M20
Operating positions Any position
1 speed pushbutton: 10x106 operations
Mechanical life 2 speed pushbutton: 10x106 operations
Illuminated pushbutton: 10x106 operations
42
MIKE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
13 11
Scheme
14 12
Scheme
LED
X2
43
MIKE
20 165.5
60
14.2
A
C
28.8
54.8
59.5
72.7
73.7 58.9
84.5
68.4 84.5
58.9
68.4
No. of Dimensions (mm)
actuators A B C
4 201 229.8 255.8
5 201 229.8 255.8
6 261 289.8 315.8
7 261 289.8 315.8
8 321 349.8 375.8
9 321 349.8 375.8
12 441 469.8 495.8
13 441 469.8 495.8
14 501 529.8 555.8
15 501 529.8 555.8
Actuators
Key selector switches Selector switches Key mushroom Mushroom Potentiometer
pushbutton pushbutton Ø 40 mm
44
MIKE
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are supplied with symbol label sheet. Standard control stations are not cULus certiied.
4 actuators
Reset-Alarm Latched Black buttons mechanically
button mushroom pushbutton interlocked between pairs
No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO
No.1 PRSL1801PI
1NC
No.1 PRSL1800PI
1NO
No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO Cover Code
2
13 13 13 13 13
color
11
14 14 12 14 14 14
1 1 2 Yellow F70AY12020000001
1 1 2 Black F70AB12020000001
1 1 2 Yellow F70AY12000200001
1 1 2 Black F70AB12000200001
6 actuators
Reset-Alarm Latched Black buttons mechanically
button mushroom pushbutton interlocked between pairs
No.2 PRSL1800PI No.1 PRSL1801PI No.1 PRSL1800PI No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO 1NC 1NO 1NO+1NO Cover Code
13 13 11 13 13 13
color
14 14 12 14 14 14
1 1 4 Yellow F70EY12040000002
1 1 4 Black F70EB12040000001
1 1 4 Yellow F70EY12000400002
1 1 4 Black F70EB12000400001
8 actuators
Reset-Alarm Latched Black buttons mechanically
button mushroom pushbutton interlocked between pairs
No.2 PRSL1800PI No.1 PRSL1801PI No.1 PRSL1800PI No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO 1NC 1NO 1NO+1NO Cover Code
13 13 11 13 13 13
color
14 14 12 14 14 14
1 1 6 Yellow F70BY12060000001
1 1 6 Black F70BB12060000001
1 1 6 Yellow F70BY12000600001
1 1 6 Black F70BB12000600001
12 actuators
Reset-Alarm Latched Black buttons mechanically
button mushroom pushbutton interlocked between pairs
No.2 PRSL1800PI No.1 PRSL1801PI No.1 PRSL1800PI No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO 1NC 1NO 1NO+1NO Cover Code
13 13 11 13 13 13
color
14 14 12 14 14 14
1 1 10 Yellow F70CY12100000001
1 1 10 Black F70CB12100000001
1 1 10 Yellow F70CY12001000001
1 1 10 Black F70CB12001000001
14 actuators
Reset-Alarm Latched Black buttons mechanically
button mushroom pushbutton interlocked between pairs
No.2 PRSL1800PI No.1 PRSL1801PI No.1 PRSL1800PI No.2 PRSL1800PI
1NO+1NO 1NC 1NO 1NO+1NO Cover Code
13 13 11 13 13 13
color
14 14 12 14 14 14
1 1 12 Yellow F70DY12120000001
1 1 12 Black F70DB12120000001
1 1 12 Yellow F70DY12001200001
1 1 12 Black F70DB12001200001
45
MIKE
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
2 A2
A1 A32 A33
A3 A34
A4
A5
A16
A21
A6
A7
A18
A35
A8
A17
A9
A19 A23 A35
A22
A10
A24
A20
A25
A11
A26
A12 A27
A24
A13 A23
A14
A28
A15 A30
A29
A6 A31
A5
A9
A8
A10
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Potentiometers”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom
pushbuttons”, “Key selector switches”, “Selector switches” and Accessories”.
46
MIKE
COMPONENTS
Switches
11
X1
A25
X1
Potentiometers
Potentiometer 1 kΩ PRSL1893PI
Actuators
PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
A1 Disk for pushbutton See disk table
47
MIKE
Pilot lights
White PRSL1844PI
Green PRSL1841PI
Blue PRSL1846PI
2 A13
Red PRSL1840PI
Yellow PRSL1842PI
Orange PRSL1843PI
Mushroom pushbuttons
Red PRSL1885ROC
Blue PRSL1885BLC
Yellow PRSL1885GIC
A10 Impulse mushroom pushbutton
Ø 33 mm with black base
Green PRSL1885VEC
Orange PRSL1885ARC
Black PRSL1885NEC
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
X 0 PRSL1867PI
A12 0/1
A29
X 0 PRSL1868PI
X 0 PRSL1869PI
1/0/2
X 0 PRSL1870PI
X 0 PRSL1871PI
0/1/1+2
X 0 PRSL1872PI
A12
X 1 PRSL1873PI
1/2 change-over
X 1 PRSL1874PI
X 1+2 PRSL1875PI
1/1+2/2
X 1+2 PRSL1876PI
48
MIKE
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1855BI
Green PRSL1855VE
49
MIKE
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1863BI
Green PRSL1863VE
2 1/1+2/2 Blue PRSL1863BL
Spring return Red PRSL1863RO
Yellow PRSL1863GI
Orange PRSL1863AR
White PRSL1864BI
Green PRSL1864VE
50
MIKE
Selector switches
Color
Ref. Drawing Positions Code
Trasparent Full
White PRSL1861BI
Green PRSL1861VE
Accessories
51
MIKE
Accessories
2
A28 Large protection PRSL1831PI
PRTA001MPI PRTA002MPI PRTA003MPI PRTA004MPI PRTA005MPI PRTA006MPI PRTA007MPI PRTA008MPI PRTA011MPI PRTA012MPI
GREEN
PRTA015MPI PRTA016MPI PRTA018MPI PRTA019MPI PRTA022MPI PRTA023MPI PRTA026MPI PRTA027MPI PRTA032MPI PRTA033MPI
RED BLUE YELLOW GREY YELLOW WHITE BLACK GREEN
OPEN CLOSE
PRTA034MPI PRTA035MPI PRTA036MPI PRTA005MGR PRTA037MPI PRTA038MPI PRTA097MPI PRTA098MPI PRTA099MPI PRTA096MPI
RED BLUE ORANGE
Transparent disks
YELLOW WHITE GREEN RED BLUE ORANGE
52
MIKE
Label sheet - Symbols
START ALARM RESET ALARM RESET STOP LIGHT RESET LINE STOP LINE START STOP BUCKET
BUCKET
UP LIFTING DOWN LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING UP AUXIL. DOWN AUXIL UP MAIN DOWN MAIN UP FAST MAIN DOWN FAST
FAST FAST 2ND SPEED 3RDSPEED LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING LIFTING MAIN LIFTING
UP AUXIL. DOWN AUXIL. UP MAIN DOWN MAIN UP WINCH DOWN WINCH UP FAST DOWN FAST
UP WINCH DOWN WINCH
LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. LIFTING 1-2 S. 1-2 SPEED 1-2 SPEED WINCH WINCH
UP SLOW DOWN SLOW UP FAST RIGHT DOWN FAST UP SLOW UP FAST DOWN FAST UP HOIST
UP HOIST DOWN HOIST
RIGHT WINCH RIGHT WINCH WINCH RIGHT WINCH LEFT WINCH LEFT WINCH LEFT WINCH 1-2 SPEED
DOWN HOIST UP FAST DOWN FAST FORWARD BACKWARD FORWARD BACKWARD FORWARD
FORWARD BACKWARD
1-2 SPEED HOIST HOIST TROLLEY TROLLEY FAST TROLLEY FAST TROLLEY TROLLEY 1-2 S.
LEFT FAST RIGHT FAST LEFT TROLLEY RIGHT TROLLEY LEFT RIGHT LEFT FAST
RIGHT LEFT TROLLEY RIGHT TROLLEY
TROLLEY TROLLEY 1-2 S. 1-2 S. BRIDGE BRIDGE BRIDGE
DOWN SLOW RIGHT FAST LEFT BRIDGE RIGHT BRIDGE CCW FAST CW FAST CCW ROTATION CW ROTATION
CCW ROTATION CW ROTATION
LEFT WINCH BRIDGE 1-2 S. 1-2 S. ROTATION ROTATION 1-2 S. 1-2 S.
ENERGIZE
CLOSE DOOR SPEED UP SPEED DOWN RAISE LOWER LOAD DOWNLOAD ENERGIZE DE-ENERGIZE
MAGNET
DE-ENERGIZE
APPROACH CONSENT AUTOMATIC MANUAL MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNET
53
MIKE
SALITA DISCESA SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL.
FRENO RITORNO SALITA DISCESA
SOLLEV. SOLLEV. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 3a VEL. 3a VEL.
SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. 2a VELOCITÀ 3a VELOCITÀ SALITA SOLL. DISCES SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL. SALITA SOLL. DISCESA SOLL.
VEL. VEL. SOLLEV. SOLLEV. AUSILIARIO AUSILIARIO PRINCIPALE PRINCIPALE PRINCIP. VEL. PRINCIP. VEL.
2 SALITA AUSIL. DISCESA AUSIL. SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA SALITA DISCESA
1-2 V. 1-2 V. PRINCIP. 1-2 V. PRINCIP. 1-2 V. ARGANO ARGANO ARGANO 1-2 V. ARGANO 1-2 V. ARGANO VEL. ARGANO VEL.
ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO DX ARGANO SIN ARGANO SIN ARGANO SIN SALITA DISCESA SALITA PAR.
SALITA LENTA DISC. LENTA SALITA VEL. DISCESA VEL. SALITA LENTA SALITA VEL. DISCESA VEL. PARANCO PARANCO 1-2 V.
DISCESA PAR. SALITA PAR. DISCESA PAR. AVANTI INDIETRO AVANTI CARR. INDIETRO AVANTI CARR.
AVANTI INDIETRO
1-2 V. VEL. VEL. CARRELLO CARRELLO VEL. CARR. VEL. 1-2 V.
INDIETRO CARR. AVANTI INDIETRO AVANTI PONTE INDIETRO AVANTI PONTE INDIETRO AVANTI INDIETRO
SINISTRA
1-2 V. PONTE PONTE VEL. PONTE VEL. 1-2 V. PONTE 1-2 V. TRASLAZIONE TRASLAZIONE
SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA DESTRA CARR. SINISTRA DESTRA CARR. SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA
DESTRA
CARRELLO CARRELLO CARR. VEL. VEL. CARR. 1-2 V. 1-2 V. PONTE PONTE PONTE VEL.
ARGANO SIN DESTRA PONTE SINISTRA DESTRA PONTE SINISTRA DESTRA SINISTRA DESTRA ROTAZ. SINISTRA DESTRA ROTAZ.
DISC. LENTA VEL. PONTE 1-2 V. 1-2 V. ROTAZIONE ROTAZIONE ROTAZ. VEL. VEL. ROTAZ. 1-2 V. 1-2 V.
CHIUSURA ECCITA
ACCELERA DECELERA ALZA ABBASSA CARICO SCARICO ECCITA DISECCITA
PORTELLO MAGNETE
DISECCITA
ACCOSTA CONSENSO AUTOMATICO MANUALE MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNETE
MARCHE MARCHE
MARCHE ALARME RESET ARRET LUMIERE MARCHE LIGNE ARRET LIGNE ARRET BENNE
ALARME BENNE
MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV.
FREIN RETOUR MONTEE DESCENTE
LEVAGE LEVAGE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. 3EME VIT. 3EME VIT.
MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV.
VITE VITE 2EME VIT. 3EME VIT. AUXILIAIRE AUXILIAIRE PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL PRINC. VITE PRINC. VITE
MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE LEV. DESCENTE LEV. MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE DESCENTE
AUX. 1-2 VIT. AUX. 1-2 VIT. PRINC. 1-2 VIT. PRINC. 1-2 VIT. TREUIL TREUIL TREUIL 1-2 VIT. TREUIL 1-2 VIT. TREUIL VITE TREUIL VITE
TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL DROITE TREUIL AUCHE TREUIL AUCHE TREUIL AUCHE MONTEE DESCENTE MONTEE PALAN
MONTEE LENTE DESC. LENTE MONTEE VITE DESCENTE VITE MONTEE LENTE MONTEE VITE DESCENTE VITE PALAN PALAN 1-2 VIT.
DESC. PALAN MONTEE DESCENTE AVANT ARRIERE AVANT ARRIERE AVANT CHARIOT
AVANT ARRIERE
1-2 VIT. PALAN VITE PALAN VITE CHARIOT CHARIOT CHARIOT VITE CHARIOT VITE 1-2 VIT.
ARR. CHARIOT AVANT ARRIERE AVANT PONT ARRIERE PONT AVANT PONT ARRIERE PONT AVANT ARRIERE
GAUCHE
1-2 VIT. PONT PONT VITE VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. TRANSLATION TRANSLATION
TREUIL GAUCHE DROITE PONT GAUCHE PONT DROITE PONT GAUCHE DROITE GAUCHE DROITE GAUCHE ROT. DROITE ROT.
DESC. LENTE VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT. ROTATION ROTATION ROTATION VITE ROTATION VITE 1-2 VIT. 1-2 VIT.
GAUCHE ROT. DROITE ROT. GAUCHE BOITE DROITE BOITE CHARIOT CHARIOT
LENT VITE VITE CHARIOT VITE PONT
3EME VIT. 3EME VIT. A BOUTONS A BOUTONS GAUCHE DROITE
ACCOUPLEMNT.
VITE LEVAGE VITE ROTATION OUVRE FERME OUVRE PINCE FERME PINCE OUVRE BENNE FERME BENNE OUVRE PORTAIL
TREUIL
FERME PORTAIL ACCELERATION DECELERATION HISSER ABAISSER CHARGE DECHARGE EXCITER DESEXCITER MAGNETISE
54
MIKE
Label sheet - German
HUB SCHNELL HUB RUNTER 2. GANG 3. GANG HILFSHUB HILFSHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB HAUPTHUB
RAUF SCHNELL
HAUPTHUB
HEBEN
HAUPTHUB
RAUF
WINDE
RUNTER
WINDE
RAUF
WINDE RAUF
RUNTER
WINDE RUNTER
RAUF SCH.
WINDE RAUF
RUNTER SCH.
WINDE RUNTER
2
RUNTER
1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG
RAUF RUNTER 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG SCHNELL SCHNELL
WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE RECHTS WINDE LINKS WINDE LINKS WINDE LINKS FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG
LANGS. HOCH LANGS. RUNTER SCHNELL RAUF SCHNELL RUNTER LANGSAM RAUF SCHNELL RAUF SCHNELL RUNTER HOCH RUNTER HOCH 1.-2. GANG
LAUFKATZ LAUFKATZE
FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG FLASCHENZUG LAUFKATZE LAUFKATZE LAUFKATZE
VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS
RUNTER 1.-2. GANG HOCH SCHNELL RUNTER SCHNELL VORWÄRTS RÜCKWÄRTS SCHNELL SCHNELL
VORW. 1.-2. GANG
WINDE LINKS KRANBRÜCKE KRANBRÜCKE KRANBRÜCKE DREHUNG DREHUNG DREHUNG LINKS DREHUNG RECHTS DREHUNG LINKS DREHUNG RECHTS
LANGSAM RUNTER RECHTS SCHNELL LINKS 1.-2. GANG RECHTS 1.-2. GANG LINKS RECHTS SCHNELL SCHNELL 1.-2. GANG 1.-2. GANG
DECKELVERSCHLUSS BESCHLEUNIGEN VERZÖGERN ANHEBEN ABSENKEN LADUNG ABLADEN ERREGEN ABERREGEN MAGNETISIERUNG
REIN RAUS NORD SÜD OST WEST UBERBELASTUNG TARA 1-1+2-2 1-2-1+2
SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV.
FRENO RETORNO SUBIR BAJAR
ELEVACION ELEVACION 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 3ª VEL. 3ª VEL.
SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. 2ª VEL. 3ª VEL. SUBIR AUX. BAJAR AUX. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV. SUBIR ELEV. BAJAR ELEV.
RAPIDA RAPIDA ELEVACION ELEVACION ELEVACION ELEVACION PRINCIPAL PRINCIPAL PRINC. RAPIDA PRINC. RAPIDA
SUBIR AUX. BAJAR AUX. SUBIR PRINC. BAJAR PRINC. SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR POLIP. BAJAR POLIP. SUBIR POLIP. BAJAR POLIP.
1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. POLIPASTO POLIPASTO 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. RAPIDO RAPIDO
POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. DER. POLIP. IZQ. POLIP. IZQ. POLIP. IZQ. SUBIR BAJAR SUBIR GANCHO
SUBIR LENTO BAJAR LENTO SUBIR RAPIDO BAJAR RAPIDO SUBIR LENTO SUBIR RAPIDO BAJAR RAPIDO GANCHO GANCHO 1-2 VEL.
BAJAR GANCHO SUBIR GANCHO BAJAR GANCHO ADELANTE ATRAS ADELANTE ATRAS CARR. ADELANTE
ADELANTE ATRAS
1-2 VEL. RAPIDO RAPIDO CARRITO CARRITO CARR. RAPIDO RAPIDO CARR. 1-2 VEL.
ATRAS CARR. ADELANTE ATRAS ADELANTE ATRAS PUENTE ADELANTE ATRAS PUENTE ADELANTE ATRAS
IZQUIERDA
1-2 VEL. PUENTE PUENTE PUENTE RAPIDO RAPIDO PUENTE 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL. TRASLACION TRASLACION
POLIP. IZQUIER. DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA IZQUIERDA DERECHA ROT. IZQUIERDA DERECHA ROT.
BAJAR LENTO PUENTE RAPIDO PUENTE 1-2 VEL. PUENTE 1-2VEL. ROTACION ROTACION ROT. RAPIDA RAPIDA ROT. 1-2 VEL. 1-2 VEL.
CERRAR IMANTAR
ACELERAR DESACELERAR ELEVAR DESCENDER CARGAR DESCARGAR IMANTAR DESIMANTAR
PUERTA MAGNETO
DESIMANTAR
ACERCAR CONFIRMAR AUTOMATICO MANUAL MAN-0-AUTO OFF-MAN-AUTO ON OFF ON-OFF
MAGNETO
55
MIKE
mushrooms,
pilot lights
(See next page for list of components and legends)
selectors,
elements
Cable sleeve 5 Switches
Color of
Control
Button
Fill in the chart according to the number of control elements 7 and LEDs
disks
required. Control stations are available with enclosures from 4 to Cable clamp
15 control elements. It is possible to assemble a control element Potentiometer
on the bottom of the control station only with enclosures with 4
2 an odd number of holes.
1 Control elements: enter the number corresponding to the control
element required ( 1 to 39 ) according to the legend. Eg. 25 8 MI LA
Control element 1
MI LA
Color 3
Switches 5
Yellow Black
MI LA
Label sheet 12 cULus 13
certiied
Symbols English French
Italian German Spanish 6 Hook
56
MIKE
1 Legend - Control elements
* SWITCH ACTIVATION
It is possible to mount up to 3 switches for each control element. The chart on the right of each pushbutton or selector switch speciies which position activates the
switch on the top, in the middle or on the bottom. If the selector switches are mounted with the lever facing downwards, then the the activation of the switches is reversed.
Eg.: 2 speed pushbutton: the irst speed activates the switches on the top and in the middle, while the second speed activates the switch on the bottom.
Pushbuttons Toggle selector switches Key selector switches
It is possible to mount up to 3 switches It is possible to mount only 2 switches for each selector. It is possible to mount only 2 switches for each selector,
for each button. LEDs can be mounted In the middle it is possible to mount only the LED for and no switch/LED in the central position.
only in the middle.
SWITCH
illuminated selector switches.
SWITCH SWITCH
2
ACTIVATION* ACTIVATION* ACTIVATION*
11 Pilot light
12 Blanking plug
Full color and symbol disks for pushbuttons (ref. 1 and 2 ) Transparent disks for
GREEN RED RED illuminated pushbuttons (ref. 3 )
50 55 60 65 70 75 CLOSE 80 YELLOW WHITE GREEN
RED
83 85 87
BLUE YELLOW BLUE
YELLOW ORANGE
84 86 88
YELLOW WHITE
52 57 62 67 72 77 82
GREEN GREY BLACK
53 58 63 68 73 78
5 Legend - Switches,
GREEN GREEN
LEDs, potentiometers
54 59 64 69 74 OPEN 79
90 PRSL1800PI - 1NO switch
57
MIKE
REMARKS
2
08102018
58
NPA
NPA
Pendant control station 2
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• The cable sleeve can be angled up to 20° to give the operator • Available in coniguration from 2 to 12 actuators.
the best view of all the control elements and enable a • One, two or three speed switches with NO and/or NC
natural, comfortable working position. contacts.
• Rectangular pushbuttons in thermoplastic material or rubber • Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
pushbuttons with symbol disks to ensure protection against opposite functions.
dust.
• Two-colour moulded pushbuttons and disks to guarantee
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
59
NPA
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment, functional
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
2÷6 buttons: rubber cable sleeve (Ø 10÷18 mm)
Cable entry
8÷12 buttons: rubber cable sleeve (Ø 17÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
Switch type Switch with two connecting terminals Switch with two connecting terminals
11 13
Scheme
12 14
60
NPA
Code PRSL0504PI PRSL0505PI
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 1.9 A
Rated operational voltage 380 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage 500 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations 2
Connections Screw-type terminals
1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Wires (UL - (c)UL: use 60°C or 75°C copper (CU) conductor and wire 16-18 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
13 21 33 13 21 33
Scheme
14 22 24 14 22 24
Scheme
14 24 34 14 24 34
Code PRSL0501PI
Maximum voltage 125 V
Maximum power 2.6 W
Lamp type With bayonet coupling
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
61
NPA
2 99
D
C 70
Dimensions (mm)
No. of
actuators Weight (kg)
A B C D
62
NPA
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are equipped with cable sleeve, hook and mechanical interlock between opposite function
pushbuttons.
2 actuators
PF03020005 with standard pushbutton PF03020014 with standard pushbutton
PF24020002 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24020003 with dust-tight pushbutton
2
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13 21 33
No.2 PRSL0503PI No.2 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
3 actuators
PF03030004 with standard pushbutton PF03030020 with standard pushbutton
PF24030004 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24030003 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
11 11
Latched Latched
No.1 PRSL0502PI No.1 PRSL0502PI
mushroom mushroom
1NC 1NC
12 pushbutton 12 pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13 21 33
No.2 PRSL0503PI No.2 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
4 actuators
PF03040105 with standard pushbutton PF03040106 with standard pushbutton
PF24040024 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24040006 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13
Pushbutton 13
Pushbutton
No.1 PRSL0503PI No.1 PRSL0503PI
1NO 1NO
14 1 speed GREEN 14 1 speed GREEN
11 11
Latched Latched
No.1 PRSL0502PI No.1 PRSL0502PI
mushroom mushroom
1NC 1NC
12 pushbutton 12 pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13 21 33
No.2 PRSL0503PI No.2 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
63
NPA
2 13
Pushbutton
13 21 33
Pushbutton
No.4 PRSL0503PI No.4 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
6 actuators
PF03060098 with standard pushbutton PF03060139 with standard pushbutton
PF24060062 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24060011 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
11 11
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13 21 33
No.4 PRSL0503PI No.4 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
64
NPA
PF03060113 with standard pushbutton PF03060293 with standard pushbutton
PF24060063 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24060029 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
11
Latched
13 21 33
No.1 PRSL0504PI Pushbutton
No.1 PRSL0502PI 1NO+1NC+1NO
mushroom
1NC 1 speed
12 pushbutton 14 22 24 GREEN
11
13 21 33
Pushbutton No.1 PRSL0502PI
1NC
Latched
mushroom 2
No.2 PRSL0505PI 12 pushbutton
1NO+1NC+1NO
14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13
No.2 PRSL0503PI No.4 PRSL0503PI
1NO 1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 1 speed Pushbutton
Pushbutton
- - Blanking plug
65
NPA
8 actuators
PF03080201 with standard pushbutton PF03080471 with standard pushbutton
PF24080044 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24080101 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 33
No.1 PRSL0504PI Pushbutton 13 21 33
No.1 PRSL0504PI Pushbutton
1NO+1NC+1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
2 14
11
22 24 1 speed GREEN
14
11
22 24 1 speed GREEN
Latched Latched
No.1 PRSL0502PI No.1 PRSL0502PI
mushroom mushroom
1NC 1NC
12 pushbutton 12 pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 13 21 33
No.6 PRSL0503PI No.6 PRSL0505PI
1NO 1NO+1NC+1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton 14 22 24 2 speeds Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.4 PRSL0503PI
1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.2 PRSL0503PI
1NO
Pushbutton 14 1 speed Pushbutton
66
NPA
10 actuators
PF03100334 with standard pushbutton PF03100398 with standard pushbutton
PF24100051 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24100072 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 33
No.1 PRSL0504PI Pushbutton Pushbutton
1NO+1NC+1NO
14
11
22 24 1 speed GREEN
13
YELLOW 2
Latched No.3 PRSL0503PI Pushbutton
No.1 PRSL0502PI mushroom 1NO
1NC
12 pushbutton 14 1 speed
Pushbutton Pushbutton
GREEN
Pushbutton 11
Latched
No.1 PRSL0502PI mushroom
1NC
12 pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.8 PRSL0503PI
1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.6 PRSL0503PI
1NO
Pushbutton 14 1 speed Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton
Pushbutton
Pushbutton
13
No.8 PRSL0503PI
1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton
Pushbutton
Pushbutton
Pushbutton
67
NPA
12 actuators
PF03120282 with standard pushbutton PF03120283 with standard pushbutton
PF24120031 with dust-tight pushbutton PF24120032 with dust-tight pushbutton
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 33
No.1 PRSL0504PI Pushbutton Pushbutton
1NO+1NC+1NO
2 14
11
22 24 1 speed GREEN
13
YELLOW
Pushbutton Pushbutton
GREEN
11
Pushbutton Latched
No.1 PRSL0502PI mushroom
1NC
12 pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.10 PRSL0503PI
1NO
14 1 speed Pushbutton Pushbutton
13
No.8 PRSL0503PI
1NO
Pushbutton 14 1 speed Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Pushbutton Pushbutton
68
NPA
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A20
A1
A15
A13
A3 A25
A2
A24
A4
A16
A11
A5 A12 A19
A17
A6
A18 A23
A7
A22
A8
A14
A21
A9
A10
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom pushbuttons”,
“Selector switches” and “Accessories”.
69
NPA
COMPONENTS
Switches
13 21 33
A16
13 23 33
13 23 33
11
A17
13
X1
Actuators
PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
A1 Pushbutton
See standard buttons
PRTA_ _ _ _PI
A2 Disk for dust-tight pushbutton
See standard disk
Pilot lights
Red PRSL0515PI
A9 Green PRSL0516PI
Yellow PRSL0521PI
70
NPA
Mushroom pushbuttons
2
A4 Latched mushroom pushbutton for emergency stop PRSL0500PI
Selector switches
A8
Accessories
71
NPA
Accessories
72
NPA
Standard buttons - Symbols
PRTA101XPI PRTA102XPI PRTA103XPI PRTA104XPI PRTA105XPI PRTA105XPB PRTA106XPI PRTA106XPB PRTA107XPI PRTA107XPB PRTA108XPI PRTA108XPB PRTA109XPI PRTA109XPB
PRTA110XPI PRTA110XPB PRTA111XPI PRTA112XPI PRTA112XPB PRTA113XPI PRTA114XPI PRTA114XPB PRTA115XPI PRTA116XPI PRTA116XPB PRTA117XPI PRTA117XPB PRTA118XPI
PRTA119XPI PRTA119XPB PRTA120XPI PRTA121XPI PRTA121XPB PRTA216XPI PRTA217XPI PRTA218XPI PRTA219XPI PRTA374XPI PRTA375XPI PRTA375XPB PRTA376XPI PRTA377XPI
RED BLACK YELLOW GREEN WHITE
PRTA130IPI PRTA131IPI PRTA132IPI PRTA133IPI PRTA134IPI PRTA135IPI PRTA136IPI PRTA137IPI PRTA138IPI PRTA139IPI PRTA140IPI PRTA141IPI PRTA142IPI PRTA143IPI
PRTA144IPI PRTA145IPI PRTA146IPI PRTA147IPI PRTA148IPI PRTA149IPI PRTA150IPI PRTA151IPI PRTA152IPI PRTA153IPI PRTA154IPI PRTA155IPI PRTA156IPI PRTA157IPI
PRTA170IPI PRTA171IPI PRTA172IPI PRTA173IPI PRTA174IPI PRTA175IPI PRTA176IPI PRTA177IPI PRTA178IPI PRTA179IPI PRTA180IPI PRTA181IPI PRTA183IPI PRTA184IPI
PRTA185IPI PRTA186IPI PRTA187IPI PRTA188IPI PRTA189IPI PRTA190IPI PRTA191IPI PRTA192IPI PRTA193IPI PRTA194IPI PRTA201IPI PRTA202IPI PRTA203IPI PRTA204IPI
GREEN GREEN
START
PRTA205IPI PRTA206IPI PRTA207IPI PRTA208IPI PRTA209IPI PRTA210IPI PRTA211IPI PRTA212IPI PRTA213IPI PRTA214IPI PRTA215IPI PRTA216IPI PRTA217IPI PRTA302XPI
RED
STOP
PRTA351XPI
73
NPA
PRTA123XPI PRTA124XPI PRTA125XPI PRTA126XPI PRTA127XPI PRTA128XPI PRTA129XPI PRTA130XPI PRTA131XPI PRTA132XPI PRTA133XPI PRTA134XPI PRTA135XPI PRTA136XPI
PRTA137XPI PRTA138XPI PRTA139XPI PRTA140XPI PRTA141XPI PRTA142XPI PRTA143XPI PRTA144XPI PRTA145XPI PRTA146XPI PRTA147XPI PRTA148XPI PRTA149XPI PRTA150XPI
PRTA151XPI PRTA152XPI PRTA153XPI PRTA154XPI PRTA155XPI PRTA156XPI PRTA157XPI PRTA158XPI PRTA159XPI PRTA160XPI PRTA161XPI PRTA162XPI PRTA163XPI PRTA164XPI
PRTA165XPI PRTA166XPI PRTA167XPI PRTA168XPI PRTA169XPI PRTA170XPI PRTA171XPI PRTA172XPI PRTA173XPI PRTA174XPI PRTA175XPI PRTA176XPI PRTA177XPI PRTA178XPI
PRTA179XPI PRTA180XPI PRTA181XPI PRTA182XPI PRTA183XPI PRTA184XPI PRTA185XPI PRTA186XPI PRTA187XPI PRTA188XPI PRTA189XPI PRTA190XPI PRTA191XPI PRTA192XPI
PRTA193XPI PRTA194XPI PRTA195XPI PRTA196XPI PRTA197XPI PRTA198XPI PRTA200XPI PRTA201XPI PRTA202XPI PRTA203XPI PRTA204XPI PRTA205XPI PRTA206XPI PRTA207XPI
GREEN GREEN RED
TRAINO FERMO LENTO ALZA INIZIO START STOP
PRTA208XPI PRTA209XPI PRTA210XPI PRTA211XPI PRTA212XPI PRTA213XPI PRTA214XPI PRTA215XPI PRTA226XPI PRTA227XPI PRTA228XPI PRTA301XPI PRTA302XPI PRTA351XPI
RED RED
STOP ALT
AVANZAMENTO
PRTA352XPI PRTA353XPI
PRTA130FPI PRTA131FPI PRTA132FPI PRTA133FPI PRTA134FPI PRTA135FPI PRTA136FPI PRTA137FPI PRTA138FPI PRTA139FPI PRTA140FPI PRTA141FPI PRTA142FPI PRTA143FPI
PRTA144FPI PRTA145FPI PRTA146FPI PRTA147FPI PRTA148FPI PRTA149FPI PRTA152FPI PRTA153FPI PRTA154FPI PRTA155FPI PRTA156FPI PRTA157FPI PRTA170FPI PRTA171FPI
PRTA172FPI PRTA173FPI PRTA174FPI PRTA175FPI PRTA176FPI PRTA177FPI PRTA178FPI PRTA179FPI PRTA180FPI PRTA181FPI PRTA183FPI PRTA184FPI PRTA185FPI PRTA186FPI
74
NPA
Standard buttons - German
GREEN RED YELLOW GREEN
PRTA130TPI PRTA131TPI PRTA132IPI PRTA133TPI PRTA134TPI PRTA135TPI PRTA136TPI PRTA137TPI PRTA138TPI PRTA139TPI PRTA140TPI PRTA141TPI PRTA142TPI PRTA143TPI
PRTA144TPI PRTA145TPI PRTA146TPI PRTA147TPI PRTA148TPI PRTA149TPI PRTA152TPI PRTA153TPI PRTA154TPI PRTA155TPI PRTA156TPI PRTA157TPI PRTA170TPI PRTA171TPI
PRTA172TPI PRTA173TPI PRTA174TPI PRTA175TPI PRTA176TPI PRTA177TPI PRTA178TPI PRTA179TPI PRTA180TPI PRTA181TPI
PRTA123SPI PRTA124SPI PRTA125SPI PRTA126SPI PRTA127SPI PRTA128SPI PRTA129SPI PRTA130SPI PRTA131SPI PRTA132SPI PRTA135SPI PRTA136SPI PRTA137SPI PRTA138SPI
PRTA139SPI PRTA140SPI PRTA141SPI PRTA142SPI PRTA143SPI PRTA144SPI PRTA145SPI PRTA146SPI PRTA155SPI PRTA156SPI PRTA157SPI PRTA158SPI PRTA159SPI PRTA160SPI
Standard disks
GREEN RED YELLOW GREEN
PRTA001XPI PRTA002XPI PRTA003XPI PRTA004XPI PRTA005XPI PRTA006XPI PRTA007XPI PRTA008XPI PRTA009XPI PRTA010XPI
PRTA011XPI PRTA012XPI PRTA013XPI PRTA014XPI PRTA015XPI PRTA016XPI PRTA018XPI PRTA019XPI PRTA022XPI PRTA023XPI
75
NPA
Control elements
PRTA________________
30 PRTAXXXXXX Pushbutton MI
Instructions
PRTA________________
- Fill in the chart to the left according to the number of control elements required
MI
(2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 actuators).
- Enter the number corresponding to the control element required. For dust-
tight pushbuttons enter the number corresponding to the symbol required;
for standard pushbuttons write the code number. Mark the direction of the PRTA________________
arrow into the corresponding circle. MI
- Enter the letters corresponding to the switches required (max. 2) into the
unbroken boxes.
- Tick the box corresponding to the mechanical interlock between pushbuttons
when required . MI PRTA________________
Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve and the hook must MI
-
be assembled (top or bottom).
03092018
Remarks
PRTA________________
Hook
Cable sleeve
76
CHARLIE
CHARLIE
Pendant control station 2
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Reduced time and costs for installation and wiring: the • Available in coniguration with 2 or 3 actuators.
switches are assembled inside the pendant station without • Single switches with NO or NC contacts and double
screws, with all the terminals facing the cable inlet and switches with NO contacts, one or two speeds, with
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
screws in the opposite direction to facilitate wiring. electrical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
• A threaded ring is used to secure the enclosure and cover, opposite functions.
providing easy access to the internal components without
any need for tools or screws.
• Thanks to the hollow handle the control station can be
CERTIFICATIONS
quickly and easily set down onto a pin.
• CE marking and EAC certiication.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with
standard EN 418.
Fill in the “request form” for accurate product coniguration.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
77
CHARLIE
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment, functional
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
Cable clamp M20
Cable entry
Spiral cable clamp M20
Operating positions Any position
Weight ~ 320 g
13 11
Scheme
14 12
78
CHARLIE
Code PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 3A
Rated operational voltage 250 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage 500 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations 2
Connections Screw-type terminals
1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Wires (UL - (c)UL: use 60°C or 75°C copper (CU) conductor and wire 16-18 AWG)
Scheme
Code PRSL1004PI
Maximum voltage 125 V
Maximum power 2.6 W
Lamp type T5.5K 22 mm
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
79
CHARLIE
28
34
2
90
31
81
48
280
44
145
123
36
95
80
28
34
90
90
81
338
48
44
145
123
36
95
80
80
CHARLIE
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are equipped with cable clamp M20, hook and electrical interlock between opposite function
pushbuttons.
2 actuators
PF39020001 PF39020002
2
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 4 23 Pushbutton Pushbutton 13 4 33 23
Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO+common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
3 actuators
PF39030001 PF39030002
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 11
13 4 23 Pushbutton Pushbutton 13 4 33 23
Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO+common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
81
CHARLIE
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A11
A10
A2
A12
A3 A19
A14
A7 A20 A22
A4
A15
A21
A5
A8
A18
A17
A6 A16
A9
A23
A13
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom pushbuttons”,
“Selector switches” and “Accessories”.
82
CHARLIE
COMPONENTS
Switches
A18
13 4 33 23
13
11
Actuators
Pilot lights
Red PRSL1012PI
A6 Yellow PRSL1013PI
Green PRSL1014PI
Mushroom pushbuttons
83
CHARLIE
Selector switches
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
0/1 X PRSL1015PI
0/1 X PRSL1016PI
A1
2 1/0/2 X PRSL1026PI
1/0/2 X PRSL1027PI
0/1 X 0 PRSL1017PI
A2
0/1 X 0 PRSL1024PI
Accessories
A7 Hook PRGA0015PE
Label ET39030001
Label ET39030021
Label ET39030014
A8
Label ET39030069
Label ET39030015
Label ET39030007
GREEN RED
A12 Closing ring for cable clamp and spiral cable clamp PRSL5524PI
84
CHARLIE
CHARLIE - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD CONTROL STATION
Remarks
85
CHARLIE
REMARKS
2
03092018
86
SPA
SPA
Pendant control station 2
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Modular enclosure with actuators arranged on a double row • Available in coniguration from 2 to 20 actuators, arranged
to enable grouping of a large number of functions in a single on a double row.
control. • One or two speed switches with NO or NC contacts.
• Rectangular pushbuttons in thermoplastic material or rubber • Double switches with mechanical interlock to prevent
pushbuttons with symbol disks to ensure protection against simultaneous operation of opposite functions.
dust. • Wide range of actuators: pushbuttons, selector switches
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with and key-selector switches, pilot lights, impulse or latched
standard EN 418. mushroom pushbuttons with rotation release.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations.
• IP protection degree: SPA is classiied IP65.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C.
CERTIFICATIONS
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
• CE marking and EAC certiication.
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
Fill in the “request form” for accurate product coniguration.
87
SPA
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards
EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment, functional
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
Cable entry Rubber cable sleeve (Ø 14÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
Single switch, 1 speed with Double switch, 1 speed Double switch, 2 speeds
Microswitch type lamp holder with bayonet with mechanical interlock with mechanical interlock
coupling (bulb not supplied)
13 21 13 21 13 21 33
14 22 14 22 14 22 34
Scheme X1 33 41 43 51 63
X2 34 42 44 52 64
88
SPA
Code PRSL0076XX PRSL0077XX PRSL0090XX
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 1.9 A
Rated operational voltage 380 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage 500 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations 2
Connections Screw-type terminals
1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Wires (UL - (c)UL: use 60°C or 75°C copper (CU) conductor and wire 16-18 AWG)
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
Double switch, 1 speed Double switch, 2 speeds
Microswitch type Double switch, 1 speed with mechanical interlock with mechanical interlock
Contacts 1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC 2NO+2NC/2NO+2NC 1NC+2NO/2NC+2NO
13 21 13 23 31 41 11 83 73
14 22 14 24 32 42 12 84 74
Scheme 33 43 51 61 53 63 71 81 11 21 43 33
34 44 52 62 54 64 72 82 12 22 44 34
89
SPA
94 64
116
Dimensions (mm)
No. of
actuators Weight (kg)
A B
90
SPA
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are equipped with cable sleeve, hook and mechanical interlock between opposite function
pushbuttons.
2 actuators
PF02020007 PF02020039
Switch Switch type Actuator type Switch Switch type Actuator type
2
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21 33
14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed 2 speeds
34 42 44 52 64
4 actuators
PF02040185 PF02040241
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
PF02040186 PF02040240
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
14 22
PRSL0074XX Latched 14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Latched
33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC - mushroom 33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC mushroom
1 speed pushbutton 1 speed pushbutton
GREEN
34 42 34 42
13 21 33 13 21 33
14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
2 speeds 2 speeds
44 52 64 44 52 64
PF02040242 PF02040063
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21
14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed
34 42
91
SPA
PF02040243
2
43 51 63
6 actuators
PF02060455 PF02060401
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
PRSL0074XX Latched 13 21
Blanking
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC mushroom
plug PRSL0074XX
13 21
1 speed pushbutton Latched
14 22 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC Blanking
33 41 mushroom
1 speed plug
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton pushbutton
14
33
22
41
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed 34 42
PF02060456 PF02060439
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
13 21 33 13 21 33
14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
2 speeds 2 speeds
44 52 64 44 52 64
13 21 13 21
14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed 1 speed
34 42 34 42
92
SPA
PF02060355 PF02060356
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
8 actuators
PF02080237 PF02080440
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 14 22 34
PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 43 51 63 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed 2 speeds
34 42 PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 44 52 64 PRSL0075XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
1 speed 2 speeds
PF02080702 PF02080703
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
13 21 13 21
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
14 22
1 speed 14 22
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton
33 41 33 41 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
PRSL0074XX Pushbutton Pushbutton 1 speed
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
34 42 34 42
1 speed
93
SPA
10 actuators
PF02100324 PF02100308
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
13 21 13 21
2 14
33
22
43 51 61
PRSL0076XX
1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC Pushbutton Latched
mushroom
14
33
22
43 51 61
PRSL0076XX
1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC Pushbutton Latched
mushroom
1 speed pushbutton 1 speed pushbutton
GREEN GREEN
34 44 52 62 34 44 52 62
PF02101187
12 actuators
PF02120306 PF02101187
Switch Switch
Switch type Actuator type Switch type Actuator type
scheme scheme
Pushbutton Pushbutton
13 21
PRSL0074XX
1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
PRSL0076XX 1 speed
Pushbutton Latched
YELLOW
14 22
33 43 51 61 1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC mushroom
1 speed pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL0074XX Latched
GREEN 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC mushroom
34 44 52 62
1 speed GREEN pushbutton
13 21
94
SPA
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A12
2
A16 A13
A17
A18
A19
A1
A2 A20
A3
A21
A4
A22
A10
A5
A11
A14
A6
A15
A7 A23
A24 A25
A8
A21
A9
A26
A21
A27
A18
A17
A16
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom pushbuttons” and
“Accessories”.
95
SPA
COMPONENTS
Switches
2
1 speed, 1NO+1NC single switch with lamp holder 14 22
A14 X1 PRSL0073XX
with bayonet coupling (bulb not supplied)
X2
13 21
34 42
13 21 33
2 speed, 1NO+1NC+1NO/1NO+1NC+1NO 14 22 34
PRSL0075XX
43 51 63
double switch with mechanical interlock
44 52 64
13 21
14 22
1 speed, 1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC double switch 33 43 51 61 PRSL0076XX
A15
34 44 52 62
13 23 31 41
54 64 72 82
11 83 73
12 22 44 34
Actuators
PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
A3 Button
See standard buttons
A6
Selector switch 1/0/2 maintained positions PRSL3543PI
96
SPA
Actuators
Pilot lights
Red PRSL3534PI
A8 Green PRSL3535PI
Yellow PRSL3542PI
Mushroom pushbuttons
Accessories
97
SPA
Accessories
PRTA101XPI PRTA102XPI PRTA103XPI PRTA104XPI PRTA105XPI PRTA105XPB PRTA106XPI PRTA106XPB PRTA107XPI PRTA107XPB PRTA108XPI PRTA108XPB PRTA109XPI PRTA109XPB
PRTA110XPI PRTA110XPB PRTA111XPI PRTA112XPI PRTA112XPB PRTA113XPI PRTA114XPI PRTA114XPB PRTA115XPI PRTA116XPI PRTA116XPB PRTA117XPI PRTA117XPB PRTA118XPI
PRTA119XPI PRTA119XPB PRTA120XPI PRTA121XPI PRTA121XPB PRTA216XPI PRTA217XPI PRTA218XPI PRTA219XPI PRTA374XPI PRTA375XPI PRTA375XPB PRTA376XPI PRTA377XPI
RED BLACK YELLOW GREEN WHITE
98
SPA
Standard buttons - English
PRTA130IPI PRTA131IPI PRTA132IPI PRTA133IPI PRTA134IPI PRTA135IPI PRTA136IPI PRTA137IPI PRTA138IPI PRTA139IPI PRTA140IPI PRTA141IPI PRTA142IPI PRTA143IPI
PRTA144IPI PRTA145IPI PRTA146IPI PRTA147IPI PRTA148IPI PRTA149IPI PRTA150IPI PRTA151IPI PRTA152IPI PRTA153IPI PRTA154IPI PRTA155IPI PRTA156IPI PRTA157IPI
PRTA170IPI PRTA171IPI PRTA172IPI PRTA173IPI PRTA174IPI PRTA175IPI PRTA176IPI PRTA177IPI PRTA178IPI PRTA179IPI PRTA180IPI PRTA181IPI PRTA183IPI PRTA184IPI
PRTA185IPI PRTA186IPI PRTA187IPI PRTA188IPI PRTA189IPI PRTA190IPI PRTA191IPI PRTA192IPI PRTA193IPI PRTA194IPI PRTA201IPI PRTA202IPI PRTA203IPI PRTA204IPI
GREEN GREEN
START
PRTA205IPI PRTA206IPI PRTA207IPI PRTA208IPI PRTA209IPI PRTA210IPI PRTA211IPI PRTA212IPI PRTA213IPI PRTA214IPI PRTA215IPI PRTA216IPI PRTA217IPI PRTA302XPI
RED
STOP
PRTA351XPI
PRTA130TPI PRTA131TPI PRTA132IPI PRTA133TPI PRTA134TPI PRTA135TPI PRTA136TPI PRTA137TPI PRTA138TPI PRTA139TPI PRTA140TPI PRTA141TPI PRTA142TPI PRTA143TPI
PRTA144TPI PRTA145TPI PRTA146TPI PRTA147TPI PRTA148TPI PRTA149TPI PRTA152TPI PRTA153TPI PRTA154TPI PRTA155TPI PRTA156TPI PRTA157TPI PRTA170TPI PRTA171TPI
PRTA172TPI PRTA173TPI PRTA174TPI PRTA175TPI PRTA176TPI PRTA177TPI PRTA178TPI PRTA179TPI PRTA180TPI PRTA181TPI
PRTA130FPI PRTA131FPI PRTA132FPI PRTA133FPI PRTA134FPI PRTA135FPI PRTA136FPI PRTA137FPI PRTA138FPI PRTA139FPI PRTA140FPI PRTA141FPI PRTA142FPI PRTA143FPI
PRTA144FPI PRTA145FPI PRTA146FPI PRTA147FPI PRTA148FPI PRTA149FPI PRTA152FPI PRTA153FPI PRTA154FPI PRTA155FPI PRTA156FPI PRTA157FPI PRTA170FPI PRTA171FPI
PRTA172FPI PRTA173FPI PRTA174FPI PRTA175FPI PRTA176FPI PRTA177FPI PRTA178FPI PRTA179FPI PRTA180FPI PRTA181FPI PRTA183FPI PRTA184FPI PRTA185FPI PRTA186FPI
99
SPA
PRTA123XPI PRTA124XPI PRTA125XPI PRTA126XPI PRTA127XPI PRTA128XPI PRTA129XPI PRTA130XPI PRTA131XPI PRTA132XPI PRTA133XPI PRTA134XPI PRTA135XPI PRTA136XPI
PRTA137XPI PRTA138XPI PRTA139XPI PRTA140XPI PRTA141XPI PRTA142XPI PRTA143XPI PRTA144XPI PRTA145XPI PRTA146XPI PRTA147XPI PRTA148XPI PRTA149XPI PRTA150XPI
PRTA151XPI PRTA152XPI PRTA153XPI PRTA154XPI PRTA155XPI PRTA156XPI PRTA157XPI PRTA158XPI PRTA159XPI PRTA160XPI PRTA161XPI PRTA162XPI PRTA163XPI PRTA164XPI
PRTA165XPI PRTA166XPI PRTA167XPI PRTA168XPI PRTA169XPI PRTA170XPI PRTA171XPI PRTA172XPI PRTA173XPI PRTA174XPI PRTA175XPI PRTA176XPI PRTA177XPI PRTA178XPI
PRTA179XPI PRTA180XPI PRTA181XPI PRTA182XPI PRTA183XPI PRTA184XPI PRTA185XPI PRTA186XPI PRTA187XPI PRTA188XPI PRTA189XPI PRTA190XPI PRTA191XPI PRTA192XPI
PRTA193XPI PRTA194XPI PRTA195XPI PRTA196XPI PRTA197XPI PRTA198XPI PRTA200XPI PRTA201XPI PRTA202XPI PRTA203XPI PRTA204XPI PRTA205XPI PRTA206XPI PRTA207XPI
GREEN GREEN RED
TRAINO FERMO LENTO ALZA INIZIO START STOP
PRTA208XPI PRTA209XPI PRTA210XPI PRTA211XPI PRTA212XPI PRTA213XPI PRTA214XPI PRTA215XPI PRTA226XPI PRTA227XPI PRTA228XPI PRTA301XPI PRTA302XPI PRTA351XPI
RED RED
STOP ALT
AVANZAMENTO
PRTA352XPI PRTA353XPI
PRTA123SPI PRTA124SPI PRTA125SPI PRTA126SPI PRTA127SPI PRTA128SPI PRTA129SPI PRTA130SPI PRTA131SPI PRTA132SPI PRTA135SPI PRTA136SPI PRTA137SPI PRTA138SPI
PRTA139SPI PRTA140SPI PRTA141SPI PRTA142SPI PRTA143SPI PRTA144SPI PRTA145SPI PRTA146SPI PRTA155SPI PRTA156SPI PRTA157SPI PRTA158SPI PRTA159SPI PRTA160SPI
100
SPA
SPA - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD CONTROL STATION
21 PRSL0074XX 1NO+1NC/1NO+1NC
22 PRSL0075XX 2NO+1NC/2NO+1NC MI
PRTA________________ PRTA________________
23 PRSL0076XX 1NO+1NC/2NO+2NC
24 PRSL0076XX 2NO+2NC/1NO+1NC
25 PRSL0077XX 2NO+2NC/2NO+2NC MI
Instructions
- Fill in the chart to the left according to the number of
control elements required (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 MI
or 20 actuators). PRTA________________ PRTA________________
- Enter the number corresponding to the control element
required (broken-line box). When buttons are required,
ill in the PRTA_____ code and mark the direction of the
arrow into the corresponding box.
MI
- Enter the number corresponding to the switches
required. PRTA________________ PRTA________________
- Tick the box corresponding to the mechanical interlock
between pushbuttons when required. MI
- Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve
and the hook must be assembled (top or bottom). MI
PRTA________________ PRTA________________
Remarks
MI
PRTA________________ PRTA________________
MI
PRTA________________ PRTA________________
Hook
Cable sleeve
101
SPA
REMARKS
2
03092018
102
ALPHA
ALPHA
Pendant control station 2
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Reduced installation and wiring time and costs: the switches • Available in conigurations from 2 to 13 actuators arranged
feature terminals facing the cable clamp of the control on a double row.
station and screws on the opposite site to facilitate wiring. • Single or double switches with NO or NC contacts featuring
• The control station has an angle of inclination giving the one or two speeds.
operator the best view of all the control elements and • Wide range of actuators: pushbuttons, selector switches and
enabling a natural, comfortable working position. key-selector switches in various operation conigurations,
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with pilot lights, latched mushrooms pushbuttons with rotation
standard EN 418. release or key-operated.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. • Available with label (symbols and lettering) to be stuck next
• IP protection degree: Alpha is classiied IP65. to the actuators.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to+70°C.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
CERTIFICATIONS
• CE marking and EAC certiications.
103
ALPHA
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment, functional
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
Cable entry Rubber cable sleeve (Ø 14÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
13 11
Scheme
14 12
104
ALPHA
Code PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 3A
Rated operational voltage 250 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage 500 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations 2
Connections Screw-type terminals
1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Wires (UL - (c)UL: use 60°C or 75°C copper (CU) conductor and wire 16-18 AWG)
Scheme
Code PRSL1004PI
Maximum voltage 125 V
Maximum power 2.6 W
Lamp type T5.5K 22 mm
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
105
ALPHA
15°
2
169
A
B
60
78
75
97
Dimensions (mm)
No. of actuators
A B
10 - 11 - 12 - 13 542 382
106
ALPHA
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are equipped with cable sleeve, hook and electrical interlock between opposite function pushbuttons.
2 actuators
PF38020005 PF38020002
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type 2
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO+common 3NO+comune
1 speed 2 speeds
3 actuators
PF38030001 PF38030002
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 11
N.1 N.1
Latched mushroom Latched mushroom
PRSL1001PI PRSL1001PI
pushbutton pushbutton
12 1NC 12 1NC
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
4 actuators
PF38040002 PF38040003
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
PF38040004 PF38040006
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO+common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
107
ALPHA
PF38040012 PF38040016
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
2
13 4 23
5 actuators
PF38050003 PF38050004
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 11
N.1 N.1
Latched mushroom Latched mushroom
PRSL1001PI PRSL1001PI
pushbutton pushbutton
12 1NC 12 1NC
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
6 actuators
PF38060001 PF38060002
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 11 Pushbutton 13 11 Pushbutton
N.2 N.1 Latched N.2 N.1 Latched
PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom
14 12 1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton 14 12 1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
13 4 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO+common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
108
ALPHA
8 actuators
PF38080001 PF38080006
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 11 Pushbutton 13 11 Pushbutton
N.2 N.1 Latched N.2 N.1 Latched
PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom
14
13 4
12
23
1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton 14
13 4
12
33 23
1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton 2
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
PF38080007 PF38080008
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
2NO + common 3NO+common
1 speed 2 speeds
13 4 33 23 13 4 33 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1003PI PRSL1003PI
3NO+common 3NO+common
2 speeds 2 speeds
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
109
ALPHA
10 actuators 12 actuators
PF38100001 PF38120001
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 11 Pushbutton 13 11 Pushbutton
N.2 N.1 Latched N.2 N.1 Latched
PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom PRSL1000PI PRSL1001PI mushroom
2 14
13 4
12
23
1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton 14
13 4
12
23
1NO 1NC GREEN pushbutton
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO + common 2NO + common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO + common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
10 actuators 12 actuators
PF38100002 PF38120002
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO + common 2NO + common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
13 4 23 13 4 23
N.1 N.1
Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton Pushbutton
PRSL1002PI PRSL1002PI
2NO+common 2NO+common
1 speed 1 speed
110
ALPHA
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A11
A9
A10 A12
A7
A22
A1 A13
A10
A19
A2
A20
A3 A14
A8
A21
A4
A18
A5 A17
A16
A15
A6
A23
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom pushbuttons”,
“Selector switches” and “Accessories”.
111
ALPHA
COMPONENTS
Switches
A18
13 4 33 23
13
11
Actuators
Pilot lights
Red PRSL1012PI
A6 Yellow PRSL1013PI
Green PRSL1014PI
Mushroom pushbuttons
112
ALPHA
Selector switches
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
0/1 X PRSL1015PI
2
0/1 X PRSL1016PI
A1
1/0/2 X PRSL1026PI
1/0/2 X PRSL1027PI
0/1 X 0 PRSL1017PI
A2
0/1 X 0 PRSL1024PI
Accessories
ET38xxxxxx
A8 Label Codes on request
A9 Hook PRGA0020PE
113
ALPHA
Single switches
A PRSL1000PI 1NO
B PRSL1001PI 1NC
D PRSL1002PI 1 speed
E PRSL1003PI 2 speeds
Instructions
- Fill in the pendant station scheme for the number of
Single Double Single
control elements required.
- Enter the number corresponding to the control element
required in the circle.
- In the broken-line box enter the number corresponding
to the symbol required on the label. Next to the number
mark the direction of the arrow and the customized
lettering, if requested.
- In the unbroken boxes enter the letters corresponding
to the single or double switches required. Single Double Single
ATTENTION: it is possible to mount 3 single switches
for each control element only if they are placed in the
irst 2 rows or in the last one.
In any other positions it is only possible to mount up
to 2 single switches for each control element.
- Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve
03092018
Hook
Cable sleeve
114
MIKE-D
MIKE-D
Pendant control station 2
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Reduced installation and wiring time and costs: the cable • Available in conigurations with 3 (1 speed version) or 4
inlet and the switches itted in the base of the control station actuators (2 speed version).
are separated from the actuators, mounted on the cover. • Direct control 1 speed two-pole switches and 1 speed three-
• Innovative suspension system with concealed cables to pole switches for emergency mushroom pushbutton.
enable rapid, correct, ergonomic installation. • Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
• Rubber pushbuttons with symbol disks to ensure protection opposite functions.
against dust and prevent jamming when the control station • 1 speed pushbuttons available in different colours and
is used in harsh environments. mushroom pushbuttons with rotation release.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with • Available with labels (symbols and lettering) to be applied
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
standard ISO 13850. next to the actuators or with pushbuttons with two-colour
• IP protection degree: Mike-D is classiied IP66, IP67 and moulded permanent symbols.
IP69K.
• IK protection degree: Mike-D is classiied IK09.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C.
CERTIFICATIONS
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
• CE marking.
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
Fill in the “request form” for accurate product coniguration.
115
MIKE-D
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards
EN 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Switches, disconnectors, switch-dis-
connectors and fuse-combination units
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
ISO 13850 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design
Scheme
12 22 12 22 32
116
MIKE-D
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
1 speed 2 speeds
165.5
165.5
60
60
20 20
14.2
201
14.2
261
59.5
72.7
73.7
59.5
72.7
73.7
117
MIKE-D
1 speed
F72AY00001
11 21 31
2 Latched
No. 1 PRSL1902PI
mushroom pushbutton
12 22 32
Blanking plug - -
11 21
No. 1 PRSL1900PI
12 22
No. 2 buttons mechanically
interlocked 11 21
No. 1 PRSL1900PI
12 22
2 speeds
F72EY00001
11 21 31
Latched
No. 1 PRSL1902PI
mushroom pushbutton
12 22 32
Blanking plug - -
11 21
No. 1 PRSL1900PI
12 22
No. 2 buttons mechanically
interlocked 11 21
No. 1 PRSL1900PI
12 22
Blanking plug - -
11 21
118
MIKE-D
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A13 A14
A15
A12
A6
A10
A16
A7
A1 A11
A8
A16
A9
A2
A4
A3
A5
See the following tables for description of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Mushroom pushbuttons” and “Accessories”.
119
MIKE-D
COMPONENTS
Switches
11 21
Actuators
A3 PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
Disk for pushbutton See disk table
Mushroom pushbuttons
Accessories
120
MIKE-D
Accessories
Disks
RED YELLOW WHITE BLACK
OPEN CLOSE
PRTA002MPI PRTA005MPI PRTA006MPI PRTA015MPI PRTA016MPI PRTA037MPI PRTA038MPI PRTA097MPI PRTA098MPI PRTA099MPI
Label sheet
RESET
START
STOP
121
MIKE-D
Instructions
3 Hook
Fill in the chart according to the type of the pendant station
MIKE-D 2 SPEEDS
MIKE-D 1 SPEED
required (1 or 2 speeds).
1 Button disks: for pushbuttons with disks enter the number 4 Cable sleeve
corresponding to the disk required ( 10 to 23 ) according to
2 the legend.
If you choose disks with arrows (legend 11 to 14 ), enter the
Cable clamp
direction of the arrow in the circle. Eg.
2 Pushbuttons: tick the box corresponding to the type of
pushbutton required. Latched
Hook: tick the box at the top or at the bottom if the hook is
mushroom
3 pushbutton
required. Eg. Hook X
4 Cable sleeve and cable clamp: tick the box if the cable sleeve
or the cable clamp are required.
Eg. SleeveX
5 Label sheet: stickers with letterings or symbols may be placed
on the left and on the right of any control element. If label sheets Blanking
are required, tick the corresponding box. plug
1 2
Button
disk Pushbutton with disk
1 Legend - Button disks
Grey pushbutton
Color and symbol disks for pushbuttons Black pushbutton
RED BLACK BLUE
10 13 16 CLOSE
19 22
WHITE RED
Grey pushbutton
12 15 OPEN 18 21 Black pushbutton
Blanking
plug
Button
disk Pushbutton with disk
Grey pushbutton
Black pushbutton
3 Hook
5 Label sheet
Remarks
03092018
122
NPA-CP
NPA-CP
Pendant control station 2
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• The cable sleeve can be angled up to 20° to give the operator • Available in coniguration from 2 to 8 actuators.
the best view of all the control elements and enable a • 1 or 2 speed two-pole switches or 1 speed three-pole
natural, comfortable working position. switches, with or without brake contact, for direct control.
• Rubber pushbuttons with symbol disks to ensure protection • Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
against dust and prevent jamming when the control station opposite functions.
is used in harsh environments.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
123
NPA-CP
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
2 Conformity to CE Standards
EN 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Switches, disconnectors, switch-dis-
connectors and fuse-combination units
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency stop equipment, functional
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
2÷6 buttons: rubber cable sleeve (Ø 10÷18 mm)
Cable entry
8 buttons: rubber cable sleeve (Ø 17÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
14 24 14 24 84 14 24 32 34
Scheme 53 63 53 63 73 53 63 41 41
54 64 54 64 74 54 64 42 44
124
NPA-CP
Code PRSL0461PI PRSL0471PI
Utilisation category AC 3 - AC 4 AC 3 - AC 4
Rated operational current 10 A
Rated operational voltage 400 Vac
Rated operational power 2.2 kW
Rated thermal current 20 A
Rated insulation voltage 660 Vac 2
Brake operating contact 100 Vac, 0.7 A, L/R=100 ms -
Mechanical life 1x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals with self-lifting pads
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
2 speeds, two-pole double switch,
Switch type 1 speed, three-pole double switch
with brake contact
13 23 31 31 83 13 23
31 41
14 24 32 34 84 14 24
Scheme 53 63 41 41 73 53 63
32 42
54 64 42 44 74 54 64
31 41
11 21 31
14 24 84
Scheme 53 63 73
32 42
12 22 32
54 64 74
125
NPA-CP
2
D
C 70
99
Dimensions (mm)
No. of
actuators
A B C D
2 292 140 76 87
3 333 181 76 87
4 372 222 76 87
6 459 307 76 87
126
NPA-CP
STANDARD CONTROL STATIONS
Standard control stations are equipped with cable sleeve, hook and mechanical interlock between opposite functions
pushbuttons.
3 actuators
PF30030001 PF30030003
2
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 21 31 11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom 3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton 12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
13 23
Pushbutton 13 23 31 31
Pushbutton
31 41
14 24
PRSL0471PI 14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI
53 63 1 speed 53 63 41 41 2 speeds
32 42
three-pole Pushbutton two-pole Pushbutton
54 64 54 64 42 44
PF30030004
11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
13 23
Pushbutton
14 24
PRSL0458PI
53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
6 actuators
PF30060002 PF30060004
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 21 31 11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom 3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton 12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI 14 24
PRSL0471PI
53 63 41 41 2 speeds 53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton 32 42
three-pole Pushbutton
54 64 42 44 54 64
13 23
13 23 31 31
Pushbutton Pushbutton
31 41
14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI 14 24
PRSL0471PI
53 63 41 41 2 speeds 53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton 32 42
three-pole Pushbutton
54 64 42 44 54 64
127
NPA-CP
PF30060019
11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
2 - - Blanking plug
13 23
Pushbutton
14 24
PRSL0458PI
53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
13 23
Pushbutton
14 24
PRSL0458PI
53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
8 actuators
PF30080001 PF30080010
Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type Switch scheme Switch type Actuator type
11 21 31 11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom 3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton 12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI 14 24
PRSL0471PI
53 63 41 41 2 speeds 53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton 32 42
three-pole Pushbutton
54 64 42 44 54 64
13 23
13 23 31 31
Pushbutton Pushbutton
31 41
14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI 14 24
PRSL0471PI
53 63 41 41 2 speeds 53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton 32 42
three-pole Pushbutton
54 64 42 44 54 64
13 23
13 23 31 31
Pushbutton Pushbutton
31 41
14 24 32 34
PRSL0460PI 14 24
PRSL0471PI
53 63 41 41 2 speeds 53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton 32 42
three-pole Pushbutton
54 64 42 44 54 64
128
NPA-CP
PF30080022
11 21 31
PRSL0508PI Latched
3NC mushroom
12 22 32 1 speed pushbutton
- - Blanking plug 2
13 23
Pushbutton
PRSL0458PI
14
53
24
63
1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
13 23
Pushbutton
14 24
PRSL0458PI
53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
13 23
Pushbutton
14 24
PRSL0458PI
53 63 1 speed
two-pole Pushbutton
54 64
129
NPA-CP
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
2
A13
A8
A10
A18
A17
A11
A12
A1
A2
A7
A16
A3
A4
A15
A5
A6
A9
A14
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Mushroom pushbuttons” and
“Accessories”.
130
NPA-CP
COMPONENTS
Switches
14 24
2
1 speed, two-pole double switch 53 63 PRSL0458PI
54 64
13 23 83
14 24 84
1 speed, two-pole double switch, with brake contact 53 63 73 PRSL0459PI
54 64 74
13 23 31 31
14 24 32 34
2 speeds, two-pole double switch 53 63 41 41 PRSL0460PI
54 64 42 44
A12 13 23 31 31 83
14 24 32 34 84
2 speeds, two-pole double switch, with brake contact 53 63 41 41 73 PRSL0461PI
54 64 42 44 74
13 23
31 41
14 24
1 speed, three-pole double switch 53 63 PRSL0471PI
32 42
54 64
13 23 83
31 41
14 24 84
1 speed, three-pole double switch, with brake contact 53 63 73 PRSL0472PI
32 42
54 64 74
11 21 31
Actuators
PRTA_ _ _ _ _ _
A5 Disk for dust-tight pushbutton
See standard disk
131
NPA-CP
Mushroom pushbuttons
Accessories
132
NPA-CP
Accessories
Standard disks
RED
PRTA002XPI PRTA005XPI PRTA006XPI PRTA007XPI PRTA008XPI PRTA011XPI PRTA012XPI PRTA015XPI PRTA016XPI PRTA018XPI
133
NPA-CP
19 2 speed switches
PRSL0517PI Blanking plug
E PRSL0460PI Two-pole switch
20 PRSL0600PI Emergency stop Hook
mushroom pushbutton F PRSL0461PI Two-pole switch
with brake Cable sleeve
contact
21 PRSL0512PI Impulse mushroom
pushbutton
2-4-6-8 actuators
22 PRSL0520PI Key mushroom Hook
pushbutton
Cable sleeve
Control
Mushroom pushbuttons are itted with elements
PRSL0508PI switches (1 speed 3NC).
Switches
MI
Instructions
- Fill in the chart to the lesft according to the number of control elements required
(2, 3, 4, 6, or 8 actuators).
- Enter the number corresponding to the control element required. Mark the
direction of arrow into the corresponding circle.
- Enter the letters corresponding to the switches required. MI
- Tick the box corresponding to the mechanical interlock between pushbuttons
when required . MI
- Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve and the hook must
be assembled (top or bottom).
Remarks MI
03092018
MI
Hook
Cable sleeve
134
NPA-CP
REMARKS
135
136
JOYSTICKS 3
137
138
JULIET
JULIET
Joystick 3
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Designed to facilitate maintenance, reducing down time • Available with up to 5 speeds for each direction.
and costs: the switches are assembled on pull-out or ixed • Stepped or linear operations.
terminal boards. • Cross or 360° movement.
• Light and handy: weight 250 grams. • Available with terminal boards or potentiometers.
• Mechanical life of switches: 5 million operations.
• IP protection degree: Juliet is classiied IP00 or IP65, when
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
139
JULIET
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
Marcature e omologazioni C
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 00 (IP 65 max. when assembled in Juliet-PK or in a speciic enclosure)
Operating positions Any position
Weight 250 g
Code PRVV0804PE
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 2A
Rated operational voltage 48 Vac
Rated thermal current 8A
Rated insulation voltage 1000 Vac
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 0.14 mm2 - 1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.22 Nm - 0.25 Nm
Microswitch type Single break
Contacts 1NO+1NC
2 4
Scheme
1
140
JULIET
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
Standard
28° 28°
60
60
150.1
5.3
40.5
90.1
26.2
5.5
18.1
44 80.3
22
Ø40 for fixing
plate hole
38
22
44
83
With potentiometer
28° 28°
60
60
134.3
5.3
40.5
74.3
24
44 85.5
22
22
85.5
44
141
JULIET
STANDARD JOYSTICKS
Juliet standard joysticks feature spring return stepped movement and they are equipped with 1NO+1NC switches
2 4
3 Direction of movement
Positions Code
360° Cross
1-0 X PF340210000004
1-1 X PF340211000001
1-2 X PF340212000001
1-3 X PF340213000001
2-0 X PF340220000004
2-2 X PF340222000001
2-3 X PF340223000001
3-0 X PF340230000004
3-3 X PF340233000001
3-3 X PF340233000004
4-0 X PF340240000004
1-5 X PF340215000001
3-5 X PF340235000001
5-5 X PF340255000001
5-5 X PF340255000004
142
JULIET
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
3
A1 A1
A2 A2
A3 A3
A3 A3
A4 A4
A4 A4
A4 A4
A6
A5
A6
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switch boards”, “Potentiometers”, “Lever guides”, “Cams” and
“Accessories”.
143
JULIET
COMPONENTS
Switch boards
Potentiometers
Potentiometer 5 kΩ PRVV9021PE
A6
Potentiometer 10 kΩ PRVV9026PE
Lever guides
144
JULIET
Cams
Accessories
A1 Bellows PRSL0173PI
145
JULIET
Movement
Joystick with terminal board
Stepped
Linear
3 C 0 D C 0 D
Lever guide Number of steps in each direction A A
C 0 D
A
0 0
B B
0
C D
A A
B B
0 0
Examples
B B
C 0 D C 0 D
PotentiometerS
1 5 kΩ 2 10 kΩ 3 Pre-set only
C 0 D C 0 D D 0 C D 0 C
A A A A
0 0 0 0
A A
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
B B B B
C D D C
A A A A
B B
0 0 0 0
B B B B
C 0 D C 0 D D 0 C D 0 C
Potentiometer Potentiometer
Instructions
- Tick the box corresponding to the type of movement required.
- Choose the type of lever guide required blackening the boxes corresponding to the number of steps of the lever in each
direction.
- In case of potentiometers, write the number corresponding to the potentiometer.
03092018
- Fill in the contact scheme blackening the boxes corresponding to the positions where the cams close the contacts
(each bar of 11 boxes corresponds to a switch; the central box corresponds to the zero position of the joystick). In the
example, the contact is closed in positions 1-2-3 to the left and 3-4 to the right.
5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
146
JULIET-PK
JULIET-PK
Joystick station 3
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Designed for Juliet joysticks. • Wide range of actuators: pushbuttons, selector switches and
• Designed to facilitate maintenance, reducing down time and key-selector switches, pilot lights.
costs. • Switches with 1NC or 1NO contacts.
• Aluminium protection against accidental operation in case • The variable length strap, for waist or shoulder wear,
of impact. features a quick fastening system.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with • Available with customized labels and enclosures with
standard EN 418 and is positioned in the middle for intuitive different size holes.
operation in case of danger.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
147
JULIET-PK
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
Cable entry Cable sleeve (Ø 14÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
Weight ~1.5 kg
13 11
Scheme
14 12
148
JULIET-PK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE LAMP HOLDERS
Code PRSL1004PI
Maximum voltage 125 V
Maximum power 2,6 W
Lamp type T5.5K 22 mm
Connections Screw-type terminals 3
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
Code PRVV0804PE
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated thermal current 8A
Rated insulation voltage 1000 Vac
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 0.14 mm2 - 1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.22 Nm - 0.25 Nm
Microswitch type Single break
Contacts 1NO+1NC
2 4
Scheme
1
149
JULIET-PK
15°
60
187
118
67
265 15°
165
430 197
150
JULIET-PK
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5 A7
A6
A8
A10
A9
A10
A15
A11
A12 A11
A16
A13
A14
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Mushroom pushbuttons”,
“Selector switches”, “Joystick”s and “Accessories”.
151
JULIET-PK
COMPONENTS
Switches
13
Actuators
A3 Pushbutton PRTS000001
Pilot lights
Red PRSL1012PI
A6 Yellow PRSL1013PI
Green PRSL1014PI
Mushroom pushbuttons
Selector switches
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
0/1 X 0 PRSL1017PI
A4
0/1 X 0 PRSL1024PI
0/1 X PRSL1015PI
0/1 X PRSL1016PI
A5
1/0/2 X PRSL1026PI
1/0/2 X PRSL1027PI
152
JULIET-PK
Joysticks
3
PF34_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A14 Joystick Juliet Refer to joystick Juliet
documentation
Accessories
A7
153
JULIET-PK
3 B D F H
3 PRSL1023PI Blanking plug
4 PRSL1012PI Red pilot light
C G
5 PRSL1013PI Yellow pilot light
O 6 PRSL1014PI Green pilot light
M N Q R 7 PRSL1015PI Selector switch 0/1 spring return
P
8 PRSL1016PI Selector switch 0/1 maintained positions
9 PRSL1026PI Selector switch 1/0/2 spring return
10 PRSL1027PI Selector switch 1/0/2 maintained positions
Control elements and switches
11 PRSL1017PI Key selector switch 0/1 maintained positions
Control element Switches
12 PRSL1024PI Key selector switch 0/1 spring return
M
Switches
N
20 PRSL1000PI 1NO
O
21 PRSL1001PI 1NC
P
22 PRSL1004PI Lamp holder
Q
30 31 32 33
Joystick label
YELLOW
Text 34
GREEN YELLOW BLACK
A RED
40 41 42 43
B
WHITE
C 44
F Left
G
Instructions
H
- Write the code number of the left and right Juliet joysticks
required.
Control element label - Write the number or the code corresponding to the control
elements and switches (max 3) required in each position.
Label ATTENTION: mushroom pushbutton PRSL1009PI can be
Symbol color Text placed only in the O position.
- Write the text required on the label for each position of the
M joystick.
- Write the symbol, the color and the text required on the label
N for each control element.
- Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve
O must be assembled.
P
154
HERCULES
HERCULES
Joystick 3
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES
• Stepless proportional version available, with built-in
analogue actuator and current, voltage or PWM outputs.
• Fiberglass nylon structural components and steel levers
ensure maximum resistance.
• Mechanical life of switches: 5 million operations. HERCULES-CK
• IP protection degree: Hercules is classiied IP00 or IP65,
when housed in a speciic enclosure. • Hercules-CK is a joystick specially designed for controlling
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C. industrial handling machines and it features switches with
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
155
HERCULES
Movement
on bearing
One-piece steel casting
levers
3
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
2014/35/UE Low Voltage Directive
Conformity to Community Directives
2006/42/CE Machinery Directive
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
Conformity to CE Standards
EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) - Generic standards - Immunity for indus-
trial environments
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 00 (IP 65 max. when housed in a speciic enclosure)
Insulation category Class I
Operating positions Any position
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
156
HERCULES
HERCULES - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
Code PRVV0804PE
Utilisation category AC 15
Inductive load 48 Vac/1 A
125 Vac/1 A
250 Vac/0,5 A
Operating electrical usages
30 Vdc/1 A 3
Resistive load 48 Vac/2 A
125 Vac/3 A
250 Vac/2 A
30 Vdc/3 A
Rated thermal current 8A
Rated insulation voltage 1000 Vac
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm - 0.6 Nm
Switch type Single break
Contacts 1NO+1NC
2 4
Scheme
1
Scheme 2x
12 14 12
157
HERCULES
158
HERCULES
HERCULES - OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
With knob
Ø40
32° 32°
Ø61 for
fixing 3
plate hole
136
222.5
216
79
103 103
25
25
100
100
67
50
50
50
67
33.5
33.5
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
100
With T handle
32° 32°
Ø61 for
fixing
plate hole
137
216
79
103 103
25
25
100
100
50
67
50
67
50
33.5
33.5
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33,5 33.5 100
67 67
100
159
HERCULES
With potentiometer
3 137
216
79
131.7 131.7
25
25
100
50
67
50
50
67
33.5
33.5
128
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33.5 100
67
33.5
67
78
128
With handle
55,5
15°
Ø61 for
fixing
178
plate hole
257
79
103 103
50 No. 8 fixing holes Ø3.2 Label (available on request)
No. 8 fixing
25 holes Ø3.2 No.4 holes, deep 50 No.4 fixing
50 19 mm holes Ø5.5
25
25
25
25
25
100
100
67
50
67
50
50
33,5
33,5
Ø6
1
33,5 33,5 100
67 67
100
110,2
160
HERCULES
With ergonomic handle
52 15°
Ø61 for
fixing
plate hole
3
202
281
79
103 103
50
25 No. 8 fixing holes Ø3.2 Label (available on request)
No. 8 fixing
holes Ø3.2 No.4 holes, deep 50 No.4 fixing
50 19 mm holes Ø5.5
25
25
143.7
25
25
100
67
50
67
50
50
100
33,5
33.5
25
Ø6
1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
100
Ø40
*211.3 (219)
197
202
*75,3 (83)
61.6
66
12
103
103
25
25
100
67
50
50
50
67
33.5
33.5
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
161
HERCULES
With T handle
* PRSL0191XX switches
( ) PRSL1000PI or PRSL1001PI switches.
32° 32°
Ø61 for
fixing
plate hole
137
3
*212.3 (220)
203
198
*75.3 (83)
61.6
66
12
103 103
25
25
100
50
67
50
67
50
33.5
33.5
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
With potentiometer
216
79
116 131.7
25
25
50
67
100
67
50
50
33.5
33.5
Ø7 Ø6
4 1
33.5 100
33.5 67
67
162
HERCULES
With simple handle
55.5
15°
Ø61 for
fixing
3
178
plate hole
244
61.6
66
103 103
25
25
100
67
50
67
50
50
33.5
33.5
Ø6
1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
110.2
52 15°
Ø61 for
fixing
plate hole
202
268
61.6
66
12
103 103
50
25 No. 8 fixing holes Ø3.2 Label (available on request)
No. 8 fixing
holes Ø3.2 No.4 holes, deep 50 No.4 fixing
50 19 mm holes Ø5.5
25
25
143.7
25
25
100
67
50
67
50
50
33.5
33.5
25
Ø6
1
33.5 33.5 100
67 67
163
HERCULES
STANDARD JOYSTICKS
All standard joysticks feature spring return stepped movement.
2 4
Hercules joysticks are equipped with 1NO+1NC switches PRVV0804PE and ixed terminal board.
11
1
Hercules-CK joysticks are equipped with 1NC+1NC switches PRSL0190XX 2 x .
3 12
Knob with
button
164
HERCULES
Direction of movement Hercules code Hercules-CK code
165
HERCULES
A10
3 A1
A1
A8
A8
A11
A1
A9
A3
A2
A2
A4
A3
A3
A4
A4
A6
A6
A5
A6
A7
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Buttons“, “Switch boards”, “Potentiometers”, “Selector
switches”, “Cams” and “Accessories”.
166
HERCULES
HERCULES-CK - ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A10
A1 3
A1
A8
A8
A11
A1
A9
A3
A2
A2
A4
A3
A12
A3
A4
A4
A12 A13
A12
A13
A13
A14
A15
A7
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Buttons“, “Switch boards”, “Potentiometers”, “Selector
switches”, “Cams” and “Accessories”.
167
HERCULES
COMPONENTS
Switches
11 11
11
13
1 NO switch PRSL1000PI
14
A15
11
1 NC switch PRSL1001PI
12
Buttons
Switch boards
Potentiometers
168
HERCULES
Selector switches
Accessories
A2 Bellows PRGU6050PE
169
HERCULES
3 Free movement
Mechanical interlock +
NC/NO contact Lever guide
(not available for proportional
Hercules) Standard lever guide Customized lever guide
(not available for proportional Hercules)
P1 1NO button C 0 D
Colour of button A
black green
in speciic enclosure)
5 steps directions A-B 5 steps directions A-B
Function 5 steps directions C-D 5 steps directions C-D
360° movement Cross movement
B
Free movement
Mechanical interlock +
NC/NO contact
(not available for proportional
Hercules)
Ergonomic handle 1
(IP43 assembled 2
3 4
in speciic enclosure) 3
4
2
170
HERCULES
Potentiometer
Joystick with potentiometers
Potentiometer
C 0 D C 0 D
1 PRVV9035PE 2.2 kΩ A A
2 PRVV9020PE 4.7 kΩ
3 PRVV9025PE 10 kΩ
0 0 3
A
4 Preset only
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
B B
Instructions C D
Potentiometer
Customized outputs
Customized outputs (A-B direction)
Voltage (from 0 to 10 V) Current (from 4 to 20 mA) PWM (from 0 to 100%)
Lever in central Lever in central Lever in central
min position max min position max min position max
Customized outputs
Customized outputs (C-D direction)
Voltage (from 0 to 10 V) Current (from 4 to 20 mA) PWM (from 0 to 100%)
Lever in central Lever in central Lever in central
min position max min position max min position max
* Select the standard output required. In case of customized outputs, ill in the ‘customized outputs’ table paying attention at the value ranges.
The value of ‘Lever in central position’ must be in between the minimum and maximum values chosen.
171
HERCULES
3 Free movement
Mechanical interlock
Lever guide
P1 1NO button Standard lever guide Customized lever guide
Colour of button
black green C 0 D
Mechanical interlock
1 Pos. Letterings
Ergonomic handle 1
(IP43 assembled 2
3 4
in speciic enclosure) 3
4
2
172
HERCULES
Switches for mechanical interlock (when required)
Potentiometer
Joystick with potentiometers
Potentiometer
C 0 D C 0 D
1 PRVV9035PE 2.2 kΩ A A
2 PRVV9020PE 4.7 kΩ
0 0
3 PRVV9025PE 10 kΩ
A
4 Preset only
Potentiometer
Potentiometer
B B
Instructions C D
Potentiometer
Remarks
173
HERCULES
REMARKS
3
03092018
174
HERCULES-PK
HERCULES-PK
Joystick station 3
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Designed for Hercules and Hercules-CK joysticks. • Wide range of actuators: pushbuttons, selector switches and
• Carry-on straps and aluminium handles provide for greater key-selector switches, pilot lights.
ease of use. • Single switches with NO or NC contacts and double
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
switches with NO contacts, one or two speeds, with
standard EN 418 and is positioned in the middle for intuitive electrical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
operation in case of danger. opposite functions.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. • Available with customized labels and enclosures with
• IP protection degree: Hercules-PK is classiied min. IP43 – different size holes.
max. IP65, depending on the joystick.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
CERTIFICATIONS
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
• CE marking.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
175
HERCULES-PK
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
Grado di protezione IP Min. IP 43 - max. IP 65 depending on the joystick
Insulation category Class II
Cable entry Cable sleeve (Ø 14÷26 mm)
Operating positions Any position
Scheme
14 12
176
HERCULES-PK
Code PRSL1002PI PRSL1003PI
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 3A
Rated operational voltage 250 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A
Rated insulation voltage 500 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations 3
Connections Screw-type terminals
1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Wires (UL - (c)UL: use 60°C or 75°C copper (CU) conductor and wire 16-18 AWG)
Scheme
Code PRSL1004PI
Maximum voltage 125 V
Maximum power 2.6 W
Lamp type T5.5K 22 mm
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 1x2.5 mm2, 2x1.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.6 Nm
177
HERCULES-PK
Code PRVV0804PE
Utilisation category AC 15
Inductive load 48 Vac/1 A
125 Vac/1 A
250 Vac/0.5 A
3 Operating electrical usages
30 Vdc/1 A
Resistive load 48 Vac/2 A
125 Vac/3 A
250 Vac/2 A
30 Vdc/3 A
Rated thermal current 8A
Rated insulation voltage 1000 Vac
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 0.2 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.5 Nm - 0.6 Nm
Switch type Single break
Contacts 1NO+1NC
2 4
Scheme
1
Scheme 2x
12 14 12
178
HERCULES-PK
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE BUTTONS (JOYSTICK HERCULES AND HERCULES-CK)
179
HERCULES-PK
254 80.9
132.1
265
150
105
64
185.5 459.5 150
645
35 35
52
590
720
180
HERCULES-PK
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A2
A3 A7
A4
A5
A6
A18
A19 A17 A8
A16
A10 A9
A11
A15
A12
A13
A14
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches”, “Actuators”, “Pilot lights”, “Selector switches”,
“Mushroom pushbuttons”, “Joysticks” and “Accessories”.
181
HERCULES-PK
COMPONENTS
Switches
11
13 4 23
A15
13 4 33 23
2 speeds, 3NO+common
double switch PRSL1003PI
Actuators
Pilot lights
Selector switches
Maintained
Ref. Drawing Positions Spring return Pull-out position Code
positions
0/1 X 0 PRSL1017PI
A3
0/1 X 0 PRSL1024PI
0/1 X PRSL1015PI
0/1 X PRSL1016PI
A4
1/0/2 X PRSL1026PI
1/0/2 X PRSL1027PI
182
HERCULES-PK
Mushroom pushbuttons
Joysticks
F66_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Refer to joystick
A18 Hercules joystick, all versions available Hercules
documentation
F66_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A19 Refer to joystick
Hercules-CK joystick, all versions available Hercules
documentation
Accessories
A9 Hook PRGA0001PE
183
HERCULES-PK
A E
3 M N O
B D G H
P Q R
C F
R
7 PRSL1014PI Green pilot light
8 PRSL1015PI Selector switch 0/1 spring return
Joystick label 9 PRSL1016PI Selector switch 0/1 maintained positions
Text 10 PRSL1026PI Selector switch 1/0/2 spring return
A 11 PRSL1027PI Selector switch 1/0/2 maintained positions
B 12 PRSL1017PI Key selector switch 0/1 maintained positions
O 44
P
Position of cable sleeve
Q Right
R Left
03092018
Instructions
- Write the code number of the left and right joysticks required.
- Write the number or the code corresponding to the control elements and switches (max 3) required in each position.
- Write the text required on the label for each position of the joystick.
- Write the symbol, the color and the text required on the label for each control element.
- Tick the appropriate box to show where the cable sleeve must be assembled.
184
HERCULES-PK
REMARKS
185
186
ROTARY
LIMIT SWITCHES 4
187
188
BASE
BASE
Rotary limit switch 4
FEATURES OPTIONS
• It consists of a gear motor that transfers movement to the • Revolution ratios from 1:15 to 1:1500, achieved by
cams through a primary input reduction stage (worm gear combining different secondary output stages.
and helical toothed gear) and one or more secondary output • Snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts.
stages (pairs of straight toothed gears). • It can be equipped with a cam set with maximum 6
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Accurate adjustment of cams by means of screws. switches.
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • Dedicated cable clamps or connectors.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. • Available with anti-moisture plug itted to the base by means
• IP protection degree: Base is classiied IP42, IP65 or IP66, of a lock nut, to improve transpiration for the limit switch
IP67 and IP69K. while maintaining protection against water.
• NEMA protection degree: Base IP66, IP67 and IP69K is • Available with flanges, pinion gears and couplings.
classiied Type 3. • Available with direct control switches to enable direct action
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C. on the motor.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
189
BASE
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP 42
IP protection degree IP 65
IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
NEMA protection degree Type 3 (version IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K)
Insulation category Class II
Maximum rotation speed 800 rpm
Cable entry Cable clamp M16
Shafts Stainless steel AISI 430F
190
BASE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES FOR AUXILIARY CONTROL
1NO+1NC
(All NC contacts are of
Contacts 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC
the positive opening
operation type )
12 14
Scheme
11
Code PRSL0455PI
Utilisation category AC 3
Rated operational current 400 Vac
Rated operational voltage 10 A
Rated thermal current 20 A
Rated insulation voltage 660 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Wires 2x1.5 mm2, 1x2.5 mm2
Tightening torque 0.8 Nm
11 21
Scheme
12 22
191
BASE
5
7
38
Ø20
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
70 9 9
5
106
* 84.5 (97)
21.5
12
12
18.5 51.5 35 9 89 25 45
142
IP 66 / IP 67 / IP 69K
* 2/3 PRSL0003XX/PRSL0011XX/PRSL0017XX/PRSL0195XX switches or 1 PRSL0455PI switch.
( ) 4 PRSL0003XX/PRSL0011XX/PRSL0017XX/PRSL0195XX switches.
53 72
9
5
Ø20
38
7
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
9
5
9
73 106
* 89 (101.5)
21.5
12
12
18.5 51.5 35 9 89
25 45
70 142
192
BASE
IP 42 or IP 65 with 12mm high lange
* 2 PRSL0003XX/PRSL0011XX/PRSL0017XX/PRSL0195XX switches or 1 PRSL0455PI switch.
( ) 3/4 PRSL0003XX/PRSL0011XX/PRSL0017XX/PRSL0195XX switches.
53 72
4
9
5
7
38
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
5
9
70
* 84.5 (97)
12
* 109.5 (122)
30.5
21.5
12
12
30.5
Ø7
4
53 72
9
5
38
7
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
5
9 9
73
* 89 (101.5)
* 114 (126.5)
30.5
21.5
12
12
30.5
Ø7
4
12
30
Ø6
83.5 33 109
142
193
BASE
63 72
9
5
4 7
38
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
5
9
70 * 84.5 (97)
22
* 109.5 (122)
30.5
21.5
12
12
30.5
Ø7
4
63 72
9
5
38
7
56
44.5
Ø20
Ø8h8
18
Ø4
5
9 9
73
* 89 (101.5)
* 114 (126.5)
30.5
21.5
12
12
30.5
Ø7
4
22
30
Ø6
83.5 33 119
152
194
BASE
STANDARD LIMIT SWITCHES
Standard limit switches are equipped with cams PRSL7140PI and auxiliary control switches PRSL0003XX with
12 14
1NO+1NC contacts .
11
IP 42 IP 65 IP 66 / IP 67 / IP 69K 4
Rated
revolution ratio
Real
revolution ratio
No. of cams
and switches
C C C
Code Code Code
2 PFA9142A0015001 PFA9165A0015003 PFA9067A0015001
1:15 1:15.82 3 PFA9142A0015003 PFA9165A0015004 PFA9067A0015003
4 PFA9142A0015002 PFA9165A0015005 PFA9067A0015002
2 PFA9142A0020001 PFA9165A0020001 PFA9067A0020001
1:20 1:20.37 3 PFA9142A0020003 PFA9165A0020003 PFA9067A0020003
4 PFA9142A0020002 PFA9165A0020002 PFA9067A0020002
2 PFA9142A0025001 PFA9165A0025004 PFA9067A0025001
1:25 1:25.96 3 PFA9142A0025003 PFA9165A0025005 PFA9067A0025003
4 PFA9142A0025002 PFA9165A0025006 PFA9067A0025002
2 PFA9142A0050001 PFA9165A0050002 PFA9067A0050001
1:50 1:50 3 PFA9142A0050003 PFA9165A0050003 PFA9067A0050003
4 PFA9142A0050002 PFA9165A0050004 PFA9067A0050002
2 PFA9142A0075001 PFA9165A0075001 PFA9067A0075001
1:75 1:75 3 PFA9142A0075003 PFA9165A0075003 PFA9067A0075003
4 PFA9142A0075002 PFA9165A0075002 PFA9067A0075002
2 PFA9142A0103001 PFA9165A0103001 PFA9067A0103001
1:100 1:103.57 3 PFA9142A0103003 PFA9165A0103003 PFA9067A0103003
4 PFA9142A0103002 PFA9165A0103002 PFA9067A0103002
2 PFA9142A0158001 PFA9165A0158001 PFA9067A0158001
1:150 1:158.02 3 PFA9142A0158003 PFA9165A0158003 PFA9067A0158003
4 PFA9142A0158002 PFA9165A0158002 PFA9067A0158002
195
BASE
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
4
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A9
A8
A10
A11
A12
A14 A13
A15
A16
A17
A18
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Standard cam sets” and “Accessories”.
196
BASE
COMPONENTS
Ref. Drawing No. and type of cams No. and type of switches Code
Other sets with 2/3/4/5 or 6 switches PRSL0003XX/PRSL0011XX/PRSL0017XX/PRSL0195XX or with 1 or 2 switches PRSL0455PI are available
on request.
Accessories
197
BASE
Accessories
198
BASE
Moulded pinion gears
S2
Legend
Z Number of teeth
M Module
L1
Dp Primitive diameter
ØDi
ØD2
De External diameter
4
Di Internal diameter
ØD1
ØD3
a Addendum
d Dedendum
ØDe 1x45°
Alpha Pressure angle
S S1
Code Z M Dp De Di a d S Alpha D1 D2 D3 S1 S2 L1
PRSL0971PI 8 2.50 20.00 25.00 14.15 2.50 2.93 3.93 20.00 8.00 2.50 14.00 18.00 8.00 4.00
PRSL0915PI 8 20.00 160.00 200.00 113.20 20.00 23.40 31.41 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0964PI 9 2.50 22.50 27.50 16.25 2.50 3.13 3.93 20.00 8.00 2.50 13.50 18.00 8.00 4.00
PRSL0963PI 9 3.50 31.50 38.50 23.40 3.50 4.10 4.71 20.00 8.00 2.50 14.00 18.00 8.00 4.00
PRSL0892PI 9 5.00 45.00 56.00 36.00 5.50 4.50 9.19 20.00 8.00 2.50 16.00 18.00 8.00 4.00
PRSL0968PI 10 3.00 30.00 36.00 23.00 3.00 3.51 4.71 20.00 8.00 2.50 14.00 18.00 8.00 4.00
PRSL0912PI 10 12.00 120.00 144.00 92.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0913PI 10 14.00 140.00 168.00 107.24 14.00 16.38 21.99 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.60 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0914PI 10 16.00 160.00 192.00 122.67 16.00 18.67 25.13 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0917PI 11 6.00 66.00 78.00 51.96 6.00 7.02 9.42 20.00 12.00 4.00 19.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0916PI 12 5.00 60.00 70.00 48.30 5.00 5.83 7.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 20.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0918PI 12 8.00 96.00 112.00 77.28 8.00 9.36 12.56 20.00 12.00 3.90 21.50 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0911PI 12 10.00 120.00 140.00 96.67 10.00 11.67 15.71 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0944PI 12 12.00 144.00 168.00 116.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
199
BASE
M Module
13 Dp Primitive diameter
4 De External diameter
12
Di Internal diameter
6 a Addendum
7
d Dedendum
Code Z M Dp De Di a d Alpha
PRSL0857PI 8 18.00 144.00 180.00 102.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0855PI 8 24.00 192.00 240.00 136.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0992PI 9 10.00 90.00 110.00 66.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0879PI 9 16.00 144.00 176.00 106.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0854PI 9 18.00 162.00 198.00 120.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0871PI 9 20.00 180.00 220.00 133.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0849PI 9 24.00 216.00 264.00 160.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0846PI 10 10.00 100.00 120.00 76.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0993PI 10 18.00 180.00 216.00 138.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0970PI 10 22.00 220.00 264.00 168.52 22.00 25.74 20.00
PRSL0856PI 10 24.00 240.00 288.00 18..00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0861PI 11 12.00 132.00 156.00 104.00 12.00 14.00 20.00
PRSL0998PI 11 18.00 198.00 234.00 156.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0997PI 11 20.00 220.00 260.00 173.36 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0859PI 11 24.00 264.00 312.00 204.00 24.00 30.00 20.00
PRSL0863PI 12 14.00 168.00 196.00 133.00 14.00 17.50 20.00
PRSL0897PI 12 16.00 192.00 224.00 154.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0972PI 12 18.00 216.00 252.00 173.88 18.00 21.06 20.00
PRSL0845PI 12 20.00 240.00 280.00 193.34 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0878PI 12 24.00 288.00 336.00 232.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0860PI 13 6.00 78.00 90.00 63.00 6.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0853PI 13 12.00 156.00 178.59 126.00 11.29 15.00 20.00
PRSL0898PI 13 16.00 208.00 240.00 170.67 16.00 18.66 20.00
PRSL0862PI 14 10.00 140.00 169.00 125.00 15.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0896PI 14 16.00 224.00 256.00 186.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0999PI 14 18.00 252.00 288.00 210.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0848PI 14 20.00 280.00 320.00 233.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0858PI 15 18.00 270.00 306.00 228.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0847PI 16 20.00 320.00 360.00 273.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0973PI 17 10.00 170.00 190.00 145.00 10.00 12.50 22.89
PRSL0974PI 17 14.00 238.00 266.00 203.00 14.00 17.50 22.89
PRSL0851PI 20 6.00 120.00 132.00 105.00 6.00 7.50 22.89
PRSL0844PI 25 1.00 25.00 27.00 22.50 1.00 1.25 22.89
200
BASE
BASE - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD LIMIT SWITCH
3 Customized cam set: for non standard cam sets, ill in the 1:20 1:100
scheme choosing the cams and the switches required. In
case switch PRSL0455PI is required, it is possible to use max
two switch. 1:25 1:150
Customized cams are available on request.
1:50 1:
4 Version with anti-moisture plug: tick when the anti-moisture
plug is required.
ATTENTION: Limit switches with anti-moisture pluga are not
cURus certiied. Standard shaft 7
35
5 Cover holding wire: tick when the cover holding wire is required. 7
Ø4
listed in the pinion gear tables in the catalogue.
When a special pinion gear is required, write the number of
teeth, the module and the primitive diameter.
Male coupling 8
12 mm high lange
IP42 C
22 mm high lange
IP65 C
Pinion gear
IP66 / IP67 / IP69K C
Pinion gear code
Remarks
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
201
BASE
Legend - Switches
202
FOX
FOX
Rotary limit switch 4
FEATURES OPTIONS
• It consists of a gear motor that transfers movement to the • Revolution ratios from 1:3 to 1:2870, achieved by combining
cams and the other movement detection devices through different secondary output stages.
a primary input reduction stage (worm gear and helical • Snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts or slow
toothed gear) and one or more secondary output stages action switches with 1NC contact.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
(pairs of straight toothed gears). • It can be equipped with a cam set (with up to 5 switches)
• Accurate adjustment of cams by means of screws. and potentiometers, encoders, Yankee absolute encoders.
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • Dedicated cable clamps or connectors.
• Mechanical life of switches: up to 10 million operations. • Available with anti-moisture plug itted to the base by means
• IP protection degree: Fox is classiied IP66, IP67 and IP69K. of a lock nut, to improve transpiration for the limit switch
• NEMA protection degree: Fox is classiied Type 4X*. while maintaining protection against water.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C. • Available with flanges, pinion gears and couplings.
• It features transmission and gear driving shafts made • Plates with universal adapter to replace existing systems.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
203
FOX
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
NEMA protection degree Type 4X*
Insulation category Class II
Revolution ratios ≥1:16: max. 800 rpm
Maximum rotation speed Revolution ratios <1:16: max. 200 rpm
Revolution ratios =1:50 and 1:100: max. 1500 rpm
Cable clamp M20
Cable entry Cable clamp M20+M16
Cable clamp M20+M20
Stainless steel AISI 430F (version not cULus)
Shafts
Stainless steel AISI 303
204
FOX
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
1NO+1NC 1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening (All NC contacts are of the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
13 21 11
Scheme
14 22 12
205
FOX
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 20
Free rotation 360°
Maximum rotation speed 800 rpm
206
FOX
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
Standard
92.5
5.5
9
4
18.1 38.1
7
56.2
69.7
5.5
Ø4
48 75.5 9
140.6 75
31.6 109
105
117
Ø12h8
8.5
44
17
16 16
6
12
35 102 32
69.7
With lange
92.5
5.5
9
18.1 38.1
7
55.2
69.7
5.5
Ø4
9
75 75.5
167.6 75
20.7 109
105
8
117
142
Ø12h8
30.5
44
Ø74
61
6
12
30. .5
5 30
2
Ø6.
37.9 84.8
129.1
207
FOX
Switches
4 PRSL0110XX
1NO+1NC
PRSL0111XX
1NC
Rated Real No. of cams 13 21 11
revolution ratio revolution ratio and switches
14 22 12
Code Code
2 PFB9067L0016010 PFB9067L0016012
1:15 1:16 3 PFB9067L0016011 PFB9067L0016013
4 PFB9067L0016008 PFB9067L0016014
2 PFB9067L0020006 PFB9067L0020008
1:20 1:20.21 3 PFB9067L0020007 PFB9067L0020009
4 PFB9067L0020004 PFB9067L0020010
2 PFB9067L0027007 PFB9067L0027017
1:25 1:27.27 3 PFB9067L0027016 PFB9067L0027018
4 PFB9067L0027014 PFB9067L0027019
2 PFB9067L0062033 PFB9067L0062045
1:50 1:62 3 PFB9067L0062044 PFB9067L0062046
4 PFB9067L0062003 PFB9067L0062025
2 PFB9067L0075008 PFB9067L0075010
1:75 1:75.48 3 PFB9067L0075009 PFB9067L0075004
4 PFB9067L0075006 PFB9067L0075011
2 PFB9067L0103037 PFB9067L0103038
1:100 1:103.44 3 PFB9067L0103049 PFB9067L0103027
4 PFB9067L0103030 PFB9067L0103050
2 PFB9067L0162007 PFB9067L0162008
1:150 1:162.52 3 PFB9067L0162006 PFB9067L0162009
4 PFB9067L0162003 PFB9067L0162002
2 PFB9067L0222011 PFB9067L0222014
1:200 1:222.58 3 PFB9067L0222013 PFB9067L0222015
4 PFB9067L0222010 PFB9067L0222016
2 PFB9067L0254019 PFB9067L0254010
1:250 1:254.57 3 PFB9067L0254020 PFB9067L0254021
4 PFB9067L0254008 PFB9067L0254022
208
FOX
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A2
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A8
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Standard cam sets”, “Potentiometers, encoders and sensors” and
“Accessories”.
209
FOX
COMPONENTS
Ref. Drawing No. and type of cams No. and type of switches Code
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
210
FOX
Potentiometers, encoders and sensors
Accessories
211
FOX
Accessories
S2
Legend
Z Number of teeth
M Module
L1
Dp Primitive diameter
ØDi
ØD2
De External diameter
Di Internal diameter
ØD1
ØD3
a Addendum
d Dedendum
ØDe 1x45°
Alpha Pressure angle
S S1
Code Z M Dp De Di a d S Alpha D1 D2 D3 S1 S2 L1
PRSL0915PI 8 20.00 160.00 200.00 113.20 20.00 23.40 31.41 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0912PI 10 12.00 120.00 144.00 92.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0913PI 10 14.00 140.00 168.00 107.24 14.00 16.38 21.99 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.60 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0914PI 10 16.00 160.00 192.00 122.67 16.00 18.67 25.13 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0917PI 11 6.00 66.00 78.00 51.96 6.00 7.02 9.42 20.00 12.00 4.00 19.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0916PI 12 5.00 60.00 70.00 48.30 5.00 5.83 7.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 20.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0918PI 12 8.00 96.00 112.00 77.28 8.00 9.36 12.56 20.00 12.00 3.90 21.50 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0911PI 12 10.00 120.00 140.00 96.67 10.00 11.67 15.71 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0944PI 12 12.00 144.00 168.00 116.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
212
FOX
Waterjet cut pinion gears
10
ØDe Legend
Z Number of teeth
M Module
13 Dp Primitive diameter
De External diameter
4
12
Di Internal diameter
6 a Addendum
7
d Dedendum
Code Z M Dp De Di a d Alpha
PRSL0857PI 8 18.00 144.00 180.00 102.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0855PI 8 24.00 192.00 240.00 136.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0992PI 9 10.00 90.00 110.00 66.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0879PI 9 16.00 144.00 176.00 106.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0854PI 9 18.00 162.00 198.00 120.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0871PI 9 20.00 180.00 220.00 133.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0849PI 9 24.00 216.00 264.00 160.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0846PI 10 10.00 100.00 120.00 76.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0993PI 10 18.00 180.00 216.00 138.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0970PI 10 22.00 220.00 264.00 168.52 22.00 25.74 20.00
PRSL0856PI 10 24.00 240.00 288.00 184.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0861PI 11 12.00 132.00 156.00 104.00 12.00 14.00 20.00
PRSL0998PI 11 18.00 198.00 234.00 156.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0997PI 11 20.00 220.00 260.00 173.36 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0859PI 11 24.00 264.00 312.00 204.00 24.00 30.00 20.00
PRSL0863PI 12 14.00 168.00 196.00 133.00 14.00 17.50 20.00
PRSL0897PI 12 16.00 192.00 224.00 154.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0972PI 12 18.00 216.00 252.00 173.88 18.00 21.06 20.00
PRSL0845PI 12 20.00 240.00 280.00 193.34 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0878PI 12 24.00 288.00 336.00 232.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0860PI 13 6.00 78.00 90.00 63.00 6.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0853PI 13 12.00 156.00 178.59 126.00 11.29 15.00 20.00
PRSL0898PI 13 16.00 208.00 240.00 170.67 16.00 18.66 20.00
PRSL0862PI 14 10.00 140.00 169.00 125.00 15.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0896PI 14 16.00 224.00 256.00 186.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0999PI 14 18.00 252.00 288.00 210.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0848PI 14 20.00 280.00 320.00 233.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0858PI 15 18.00 270.00 306.00 228.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0847PI 16 20.00 320.00 360.00 273.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0973PI 17 10.00 170.00 190.00 145.00 10.00 12.50 22.89
PRSL0974PI 17 14.00 238.00 266.00 203.00 14.00 17.50 22.89
PRSL0851PI 20 6.00 120.00 132.00 105.00 6.00 7.50 22.89
PRSL0844PI 25 1.00 25.00 27.00 22.50 1.00 1.25 22.89
213
FOX
M20 M20+M16
Version 1 M20+M20
Version C
Version X C Male coupling Coupling 8
1:15 1:150
Standard shaft 9
1:20 1:200 35
7 Stainless steel AISI 430F shaft
Ø12h8
1:50 1:300
Flexible shaft
1:75 1:450 57
7 Stainless steel AISI 430F shaft
Ø12h8
214
FOX
4 Legend - Standard cam sets 6 Legend - Potentiometers, encoders and Yankee
No. & type of switches No. & type of cams Code Description Code
2 cams A FCL20001 Potentiometer 10 kΩ with support PA020001
2 x PRSL0110XX Cams A+C FCL20003
Potentiometer 10 kΩ mechanical stop with PA020002
2 cams C FCL20005 support
5 Legend - Switches
PRSL0110XX PRSL0111XX
1NO+1NC 1NC
13 21 11
14 22 12
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
215
FOX
REMARKS
4
03092018
216
OSCAR
OSCAR
Rotary limit switch 4
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
with the standard ISO 13849 on control system safety rules.
• NEMA protection degree: Oscar is classiied Type 4X*.
• Lima can be connected to a control unit or to a PLC to
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C.
control the rotation of the limit switch shaft (thus of the
• It features transmission and gear driving shafts made of
equipments connected to it).
stainless steel AISI 430F or AISI 303, worm gear transmission
• Lima has two separate detection systems, without direct
shaft rotating on ball bearings, self-lubricating technopolymer
contact, using different technologies to ensure control
gears and driving bushes, technopolymer base and cover.
redundancy.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
• Lima allows the two detection systems to be wired by using
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
two separate cables, through a 8-pin terminal board.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
OPTIONS CERTIFICATIONS
• Revolution ratios from 1:1 to 1:1550, achieved by combining • CE marking, cULus* marking and EAC* certiication.
different secondary output stages. • Oscar is available, upon request, with the SIL1 certiication
• Each of the two outputs can be set to a different revolution (Safety Integrity Level 1), according to Standard IEC 61508.
ratio to enable diversiied control of the machine when special • Complying with accident prevention regulation BGV C 1 (only
requirements need to be met. for Germany).
• Snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts or slow action • HALT TEST (Highly Accelerated Life Test) passed, simulating
switches with 1 NC contact. conditions largely exceeding standard operating conditions.
• It can be equipped with 2 cam sets (with up to 10 switches),
potentiometers and encoders (alone or on top of cam sets Use the online conigurator (https://coniguratore.terworld.com)
with up to 3 switches) and Yankee absolute encoders (on top or ill in the “request form” for accurate product coniguration.
of cam sets with up to 4 switches).
• XL version featuring cover rise available with 2 cam sets (with
up to 12 switches), potentiometers and encoders (alone or on
top of cam sets with up to 5 switches) and Yankee absolute
encoders (on top of cam sets with up to 6 switches). * Not available on all versions.
217
OSCAR
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
IP protection degree
IP 66/IP 67 (version with cover rise)
NEMA protection degree Type 4X*
Insulation category Class II
800 rpm (Output 1 >1:22, Output 2 >1:22 or =1:1)
Maximum rotation speed
200 rpm (Output 1 ≤1:22, Output 2 ≤1:22 or =1:1)
Cable entry Cable clamp M20 - M16 (8 max)
Stainless steel AISI 430F (version not cULus)
Shafts
Stainless steel AISI 303
218
OSCAR
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
1NO+1NC 1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening (All NC contacts are of the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
13 21 11
Scheme
14 22 12
219
OSCAR
220
OSCAR
CERTIFICATIONS OF THE ABSOLUTE ENCODER YANKEE
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 20
Free rotation 360°
Maximum rotation speed 800 rpm
221
OSCAR
Storage -25°C/+75°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+75°C
IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
IP protection degree
IP 66/IP 67 (version with cover rise)
NEMA protection degree Type 4X
Insulation category Class II
800 rpm (Output 1 >1:22, Output 2 >1:22 or =1:1)
Maximum rotation speed
200 rpm (Output 1 ≤1:22, Output 2 ≤1:22 or =1:1)
Cable entry Cable clamp M20 - M16 (8 max)
Sensor connection Self-lifting screw terminal board - 8 PIN (4 for each sensor)
222
OSCAR
OUTPUT SIGNAL OF OSCAR WITH LIMA
De-energised 4
De-energised
Terminal Terminal
SHD 4 SHD 5
V+ 1 V+ 6
Z
PNP Output 2 NPN Output 7
Z
GND 3 GND 8
223
OSCAR
EXAMPLE OF USE OF OSCAR LIMIT SWITCH WITH INCREASED SAFETY SYSTEM “LIMA”
Oscar limit switch equipped with Lima can be used, just like standard limit switches, for material handling in construction plants
(e.g. to control up/down lifting of winches), with the additional possibility to control the limit switch shaft rotation when using
Lima connected to a special control unit designed to manage the following functions:
• Load drop
Type of function: inhibition.
Trigger event: the control system veriies that the limit switch shaft speed does not exceed the selected set point speed.
Reaction: brake prompt closure, preventing load to drop free.
Safety function: Lima generates a signal depending on the limit switch shaft speed; the control unit compares the measured
speed with the selected set point value.
If the measured speed exceeds the set-point value by a selected threshold, the control unit stops the motor and activates the
brake.
• Standstill shaft
Type of function: inhibition.
Trigger event: the limit switch shaft speed is greater than 0, but no valid speed command has been entered.
Reaction: brake prompt closure.
Safety function: the control system veriies that the limit switches shaft speed is equal to 0 when a valid speed set-point is not
entered.
• Shaft in motion
Type of function: inhibition.
Trigger event: the measured limit switch shaft speed is 0, but a valid speed command has been entered.
Reaction: brake prompt closure.
Safety function: the control system veriies that the limit switches shaft speed is greater than 0 when a valid speed set-point is
entered.
This function is used to check that the limit switch shaft is coupled to the gear unit, therefore detecting any shaft or limit switch
connection system break.
NOTE: The function of Lima is that of providing a signal depending on the limit switch shaft speed. The above example is
intended to describe a possible application of the limit switch Oscar equipped with Lima.
224
OSCAR
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
Standard
6.1
50.1 132.3
8.4
4
7
54
65.6
92
Ø4
38
193.6
38.6 155 119
134.5
Ø12h8
8.5
61
17
8.5
43 146.5 16 16
13
32
With lange
6.1
66.6 132.3
8.4
7
54
65.6
92
Ø4
38
210.1
175.1 119
155
122.4
159.8
8
Ø12h8
61
35 146.5
13
171 30. .5
5 30
.2
Ø6
Ø74.6
225
OSCAR
6.1
50.1 132.3
8.4
54
65.6
4
92
Ø4
38
193.6
38.6 155 119
158.3
Ø12h8
8.5
61
17
8.5
43 146.5 16 16
13
32
66.6 132.3
8.4
7
54
65.6
92
Ø4
38
210.1
175.1 119
155
145.3
182.7
8
Ø12h8
61
35 146.5
13
171 30. .5
5 30
.2
Ø6
Ø74.6
226
OSCAR
STANDARD LIMIT SWITCHES
Standard limit switches are equipped with cams PRSL7194PI and shafts made of stainless steel AISI 430F.
Standard limit switches are not cULus certiied.
Switches
Output 1 Output 2
PRSL0110XX
1NO+1NC
PRSL0111XX
1NC
4
Real
rated rated No. of cams
revolution 13 21 11
revolution revolution and switches
ratio
ratio ratio
14 22 12
Code Code
1:1 2 PFC9067L0001007 PFC9067L0001013
1:1 4 PFC9067L0001008 PFC9067L0001012
1:1 1:1
1:1 4+2 PFC9067L0001010 PFC9067L0001014
1:1 4+4 PFC9067L0001011 PFC9067L0001015
1:5 2 PFC9067L0005007 PFC9067L0005008
1:1 2 PFC9067L0005009 PFC9067L0005010
1:5 4 PFC9067L0005011 PFC9067L0005012
1:5 1:5.83
1:1 4 PFC9067L0005013 PFC9067L0005014
1:5 4+2 PFC9067L0005015 PFC9067L0005016
1:5 4+4 PFC9067L0005017 PFC9067L0005018
1:10 2 PFC9067L0011002 PFC9067L0011003
1:1 2 PFC9067L0011004 PFC9067L0011005
1:10 4 PFC9067L0011006 PFC9067L0011007
1:10 1:11.66
1:1 4 PFC9067L0011008 PFC9067L0011009
1:10 4+2 PFC9067L0011010 PFC9067L0011011
1:10 4+4 PFC9067L0011012 PFC9067L0011013
1:15 2 PFC9067L0017005 PFC9067L0017006
1:1 2 PFC9067L0017007 PFC9067L0017008
1:15 4 PFC9067L0017009 PFC9067L0017010
1:15 1:17
1:1 4 PFC9067L0017011 PFC9067L0017012
1:15 4+2 PFC9067L0017013 PFC9067L0017014
1:15 4+4 PFC9067L0017015 PFC9067L0017016
1:20 2 PFC9067L0022018 PFC9067L0022019
1:1 2 PFC9067L0022020 PFC9067L0022022
1:20 4 PFC9067L0022023 PFC9067L0022024
1:20 1:22.15
1:1 4 PFC9067L0022026 PFC9067L0022021
1:20 4+2 PFC9067L0022027 PFC9067L0022028
1:20 4+4 PFC9067L0022029 PFC9067L0022030
1:25 2 PFC9067L0031032 PFC9067L0031033
1:1 2 PFC9067L0031034 PFC9067L0031035
1:25 4 PFC9067L0031031 PFC9067L0031036
1:25 1:31.00
1:1 4 PFC9067L0031037 PFC9067L0031038
1:25 4+2 PFC9067L0031039 PFC9067L0031040
1:25 4+4 PFC9067L0031041 PFC9067L0031042
1:50 2 PFC9067L0062004 PFC9067L0062014
1:1 2 PFC9067L0062012 PFC9067L0062015
1:50 4 PFC9067L0062005 PFC9067L0062016
1:50 1:62
1:1 4 PFC9067L0062013 PFC9067L0062017
1:50 4+2 PFC9067L0062006 PFC9067L0062021
1:50 4+4 PFC9067L0062007 PFC9067L0062022
227
OSCAR
Switches
PRSL0110XX PRSL0111XX
Output 1 Output 2 1NO+1NC 1NC
Real
rated rated No. of cams
revolution 13 21 11
revolution revolution and switches
ratio
ratio ratio
14 22 12
Code Code
4 1:70 2 PFC9067L0073004 PFC9067L0073009
1:1 2 PFC9067L0073005 PFC9067L0073010
1:70 4 PFC9067L0073003 PFC9067L0073011
1:70 1:73.63
1:1 4 PFC9067L0073006 PFC9067L0073012
1:70 4+2 PFC9067L0073007 PFC9067L0073013
1:70 4+4 PFC9067L0073008 PFC9067L0073014
1:100 2 PFC9067L0107014 PFC9067L0107025
1:1 2 PFC9067L0107019 PFC9067L0107026
1:100 4 PFC9067L0107015 PFC9067L0107004
1:100 1:107
1:1 4 PFC9067L0107020 PFC9067L0107018
1:100 4+2 PFC9067L0107016 PFC9067L0107027
1:100 4+4 PFC9067L0107017 PFC9067L0107028
1:150 2 PFC9067L0156004 PFC9067L0156011
1:1 2 PFC9067L0156007 PFC9067L0156012
1:150 4 PFC9067L0156005 PFC9067L0156013
1:150 1:156.50
1:1 4 PFC9067L0156008 PFC9067L0156014
1:150 4+2 PFC9067L0156006 PFC9067L0156015
1:150 4+4 PFC9067L0156009 PFC9067L0156016
1:200 2 PFC9067L0214004 PFC9067L0214010
1:1 2 PFC9067L0214006 PFC9067L0214011
1:200 4 PFC9067L0214005 PFC9067L0214002
1:200 1:214.20
1:1 4 PFC9067L0214007 PFC9067L0214012
1:200 4+2 PFC9067L0214008 PFC9067L0214013
1:200 4+4 PFC9067L0214009 PFC9067L0214014
1:250 2 PFC9067L0254004 PFC9067L0254014
1:1 2 PFC9067L0254007 PFC9067L0254015
1:250 4 PFC9067L0254005 PFC9067L0254016
1:250 1:254.30
1:1 4 PFC9067L0254008 PFC9067L0254017
1:250 4+2 PFC9067L0254009 PFC9067L0254018
1:250 4+4 PFC9067L0254010 PFC9067L0254019
1:300 2 PFC9067L0313023 PFC9067L0313030
1:1 2 PFC9067L0313025 PFC9067L0313031
1:300 4 PFC9067L0313024 PFC9067L0313032
1:300 1:313
1:1 4 PFC9067L0313026 PFC9067L0313033
1:300 4+2 PFC9067L0313027 PFC9067L0313034
1:300 4+4 PFC9067L0313028 PFC9067L0313035
1:450 2 PFC9067L0471002 PFC9067L0471008
1:1 2 PFC9067L0471003 PFC9067L0471009
1:450 4 PFC9067L0471004 PFC9067L0471001
1:450 1:471.20
1:1 4 PFC9067L0471005 PFC9067L0471010
1:450 4+2 PFC9067L0471006 PFC9067L0471011
1:450 4+4 PFC9067L0471007 PFC9067L0471012
228
OSCAR
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A2
A3
A8
A7
A6
A5
A9
A4 A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Standard cam sets”, “Potentiometers, encoders and sensors” and
“Accessories”.
229
OSCAR
COMPONENTS
Ref. Drawing No. and type of cams No. and type of switches Code
230
OSCAR
Cam reference chart
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
231
OSCAR
Accessories
232
OSCAR
Moulded pinion gears
S2
Legend
Z Number of teeth
M Module
L1
Dp Primitive diameter
ØDi
ØD2
De External diameter
4
Di Internal diameter
ØD1
ØD3
a Addendum
d Dedendum
ØDe 1x45°
Alpha Pressure angle
S S1
Code Z M Dp De Di a d S Alpha D1 D2 D3 S1 S2 L1
PRSL0915PI 8 20.00 160.00 200.00 113.20 20.00 23.40 31.41 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0912PI 10 12.00 120.00 144.00 92.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0913PI 10 14.00 140.00 168.00 107.24 14.00 16.38 21.99 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.60 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0914PI 10 16.00 160.00 192.00 122.67 16.00 18.67 25.13 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0917PI 11 6.00 66.00 78.00 51.96 6.00 7.02 9.42 20.00 12.00 4.00 19.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0916PI 12 5.00 60.00 70.00 48.30 5.00 5.83 7.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 20.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0918PI 12 8.00 96.00 112.00 77.28 8.00 9.36 12.56 20.00 12.00 3.90 21.50 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0911PI 12 10.00 120.00 140.00 96.67 10.00 11.67 15.71 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0944PI 12 12.00 144.00 168.00 116.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
233
OSCAR
M Module
13 Dp Primitive diameter
4 De External diameter
12
Di Internal diameter
6 a Addendum
7
d Dedendum
Code Z M Dp De Di a d Alpha
PRSL0857PI 8 18.00 144.00 180.00 102.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0855PI 8 24.00 192.00 240.00 136.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0992PI 9 10.00 90.00 110.00 66.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0879PI 9 16.00 144.00 176.00 106.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0854PI 9 18.00 162.00 198.00 120.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0871PI 9 20.00 180.00 220.00 133.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0849PI 9 24.00 216.00 264.00 160.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0846PI 10 10.00 100.00 120.00 76.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0993PI 10 18.00 180.00 216.00 138.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0970PI 10 22.00 220.00 264.00 168.52 22.00 25.74 20.00
PRSL0856PI 10 24.00 240.00 288.00 184.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0861PI 11 12.00 132.00 156.00 104.00 12.00 14.00 20.00
PRSL0998PI 11 18.00 198.00 234.00 156.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0997PI 11 20.00 220.00 260.00 173.36 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0859PI 11 24.00 264.00 312.00 204.00 24.00 30.00 20.00
PRSL0863PI 12 14.00 168.00 196.00 133.00 14.00 17.50 20.00
PRSL0897PI 12 16.00 192.00 224.00 154.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0972PI 12 18.00 216.00 252.00 173.88 18.00 21.06 20.00
PRSL0845PI 12 20.00 240.00 280.00 193.34 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0878PI 12 24.00 288.00 336.00 232.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0860PI 13 6.00 78.00 90.00 63.00 6.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0853PI 13 12.00 156.00 178.59 126.00 11.29 15.00 20.00
PRSL0898PI 13 16.00 208.00 240.00 170.67 16.00 18.66 20.00
PRSL0862PI 14 10.00 140.00 169.00 125.00 15.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0896PI 14 16.00 224.00 256.00 186.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0999PI 14 18.00 252.00 288.00 210.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0848PI 14 20.00 280.00 320.00 233.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0858PI 15 18.00 270.00 306.00 228.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0847PI 16 20.00 320.00 360.00 273.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0973PI 17 10.00 170.00 190.00 145.00 10.00 12.50 22.89
PRSL0974PI 17 14.00 238.00 266.00 203.00 14.00 17.50 22.89
PRSL0851PI 20 6.00 120.00 132.00 105.00 6.00 7.50 22.89
PRSL0844PI 25 1.00 25.00 27.00 22.50 1.00 1.25 22.89
234
OSCAR
OSCAR - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD LIMIT SWITCH
Instructions Customized cam sets 6
(See next pages for list of components and legends)
1 Version: tick the required version.
6
2 Lima: tick the box if you require Lima system. 5
4
3 SIL 1 certiied: tick the box if you require SIL 1 certiied units. 3
Standard shaft 9
Revolution ratio 4 43
7 Stainless steel AISI 430F shaft
Ø12h8
Output 1 Output 2
Ø4 High resistance stainless steel AISI 303 shaft
1:1 1:25 1:200 1:1
Flexible shaft
53.6
1:5 1:50 1:250 Revolution ratio equal 7 Stainless steel AISI 430F shaft
Ø12h8
to output 1
1:10 1:70 1:300 Ø4 High resistance stainless steel AISI 303 shaft
M16
Standard cam sets 5 M16
235
OSCAR
No. & type of switches No. & type of cams Code Description Code
2 cams A FCL20001 Potentiometer 10 kΩ with support PA020001
2 x PRSL0110XX Cams A+C FCL20003
Potentiometer 10 kΩ mechanical stop with
2 cams C FCL20005 PA020002
support
4 Cams D+D+B+F FCL40001
Potentiometer 10 kΩ ±10% 4 pins with support PA020003
4 cams A FCL40003
Cams A+A+C+C FCL40005 Potentiometer 10 kΩ ±10% 3 pins with support PA020004
4 x PRSL0110XX
4 cams C FCL40007 Potentiometer 5 kΩ ±10% with support PA020005
Cams C+C+C+E FCL40009 Potentiometer 4.7 kΩ with support PA020006
Cams A+A+E+E FCL40011
Potentiometer 10 kΩ with support PA020007
5 camme A FCL50006
5 x PRSL0110XX Potentiometer 2.2 kΩ with support PA020008
5 camme C FCL50001
6 camme A FCL60003 Potentiometer 2KΩ with support PA020009
6 x PRSL0110XX
6 camme C FCL60001 Encoder 36 pulses./rev. with support PA030001
2 cams A FCL20002
Encoder 150 pulses./rev. with support PA030002
2 x PRSL0111XX Cams A+C FCL20004
2 cams C FCL20006 Yankee - current output PA01AA01
6 Legend - Switches
PRSL0110XX PRSL0111XX
1NO+1NC 1NC
13 21 11
14 22 12
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
236
OSCAR
7 Coniguration table
The following table shows possible conigurations of Oscar and Oscar XL.
When it is not possible to mount a set of cams together with a potentiometer/encoder, the table shows «Not available».
When the standard cover PA090008 is not high enough to hold the elements mounted inside the limit switch, it is possible to use the cover rise
PRSL0703PI (the table shows «Oscar XL»).
In all other cases it is possible to mount the sets of cams and potentiometer/encoder with the standard cover PA090008 (the table shows «Oscar»).
4
Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams
with 2 switches with 3 switches with 4 switches with 5 switches with 6 switches
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL
Yankee1
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available Not available
PA020001
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available Not available
PA020002
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available
PA020003
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available
PA020004
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available
PA020005
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available Not available
PA020006
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available Not available
PA020007
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available Not available
PA020008
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available
PA030001
Set of cams +
Oscar Oscar Oscar XL Oscar XL Not available
PA030002
237
OSCAR
REMARKS
4
03092018
238
TOP
TOP
Rotary limit switch 4
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
(pairs of straight toothed gears).
(with up to 18 switches), potentiometers and encoders
• Accurate adjustment of cams by means of screws.
(alone or on top of cam sets with up to 5 switches) and
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions.
Yankee absolute encoders (on top of cam sets with up to 6
• Mechanical life of switches: up to 10 million operations.
switches).
• IP protection degree: Top is classiied IP66, IP67 and IP69K.
• Dedicated cable clamps or connectors.
• NEMA protection degree: Top is classiied Type 4X*.
• Available with anti-moisture plug itted to the base by means
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C.
of a lock nut, to improve transpiration for the limit switch while
• Salt mist resistant.
maintaining protection against water.
• It features base and cover made of electrostatic varnished
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
239
TOP
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 66/IP 67/IP 69K
NEMA protection degree Type 4X*
Insulation category Class I
Maximum rotation speed 800 rpm
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
Shafts Stainless steel AISI 303
240
TOP
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
1NO+1NC 1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening (All NC contacts are of the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
13 21 11
Scheme
14 22 12
241
TOP
242
TOP
CERTIFICATIONS OF THE ABSOLUTE ENCODER YANKEE
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 20
Free rotation 360°
Maximum rotation speed 800 rpm
243
TOP
Standard
4 17 132
46
37
30
38.5
8.5
7
34
120
75
Ø12h7
68
34
Ø4
13.5
49 88 49
120
50
119
139
51
20
40 186
75 236
With lange
17 132 37
46
30
38.5
8.5
7
34
120
75
Ø12h7
68
34
Ø4
13,5
128 49 88 49
120 186
63.5
48
119
139
174
48
51
Ø110
20
Ø8.5
35 7 48
40 249.5
75
244
TOP
Top XL with cover rise
17 132 37
46
30
4
38.5
8.5
7
34
120
75
Ø12h7
68
34
Ø4
49 88 49
13.5
120
50
149
169
51
20
40 186
75
236
17 132 37
46
30
38.5
8.5
7
34
120
75
Ø12h7
68
34
Ø4
13.5
49 88 49
128
120 186
63,5
149
48
169
204
48
51
Ø110
20
Ø8.5
40 35 7 48
249.5
75
245
TOP
Switches
4 PRSL0110XX
1NO+1NC
PRSL0111XX
1NC
Rated Real No. of cams 13 21 11
revolution ratio revolution ratio and switches
14 22 12
Code Code
2 PFD9067L0001002 PFD9067L0001008
4 PFD9067L0001003 PFD9067L0001009
4+2 PFD9067L0001004 PFD9067L0001010
1:1 1:1
4+4 PFD9067L0001005 PFD9067L0001011
4+4+2 PFD9067L0001006 PFD9067L0001012
4+4+4 PFD9067L0001007 PFD9067L0001013
2 PFD9067L0005004 PFD9067L0005008
4 PFD9067L0005005 PFD9067L0005009
4+2 PFD9067L0005006 PFD9067L0005010
1:5 1:5
4+4 PFD9067L0005002 PFD9067L0005011
4+4+2 PFD9067L0005007 PFD9067L0005012
4+4+4 PFD9067L0005003 PFD9067L0005013
2 PFD9067L0010008 PFD9067L0010012
4 PFD9067L0010005 PFD9067L0010013
4+2 PFD9067L0010004 PFD9067L0010014
1:10 1:10
4+4 PFD9067L0010009 PFD9067L0010015
4+4+2 PFD9067L0010010 PFD9067L0010016
4+4+4 PFD9067L0010011 PFD9067L0010017
2 PFD9067L0015003 PFD9067L0015009
4 PFD9067L0015004 PFD9067L0015010
4+2 PFD9067L0015005 PFD9067L0015011
1:15 1:15.92
4+4 PFD9067L0015006 PFD9067L0015012
4+4+2 PFD9067L0015007 PFD9067L0015013
4+4+4 PFD9067L0015008 PFD9067L0015014
2 PFD9067L0020006 PFD9067L0020009
4 PFD9067L0020002 PFD9067L0020010
4+2 PFD9067L0020003 PFD9067L0020011
1:20 1:20
4+4 PFD9067L0020007 PFD9067L0020012
4+4+2 PFD9067L0020004 PFD9067L0020013
4+4+4 PFD9067L0020008 PFD9067L0020014
2 PFD9067L0025009 PFD9067L0025012
4 PFD9067L0025004 PFD9067L0025013
4+2 PFD9067L0025005 PFD9067L0025014
1:25 1:25
4+4 PFD9067L0025010 PFD9067L0025015
4+4+2 PFD9067L0025006 PFD9067L0025016
4+4+4 PFD9067L0025011 PFD9067L0025017
2 PFD9067L0050009 PFD9067L0050013
4 PFD9067L0050010 PFD9067L0050016
4+2 PFD9067L0050011 PFD9067L0050017
1:50 1:50
4+4 PFD9067L0050012 PFD9067L0050018
4+4+2 PFD9067L0050014 PFD9067L0050019
4+4+4 PFD9067L0050015 PFD9067L0050020
246
TOP
Switches
PRSL0110XX
1NO+1NC
PRSL0111XX
1NC
4
Rated Real No. of cams 13 21 11
revolution ratio revolution ratio and switches
14 22 12
Code Code
2 PFD9067L0075002 PFD9067L0075009
4 PFD9067L0075004 PFD9067L0075003
4+2 PFD9067L0075005 PFD9067L0075010
1:75 1:75
4+4 PFD9067L0075006 PFD9067L0075011
4+4+2 PFD9067L0075007 PFD9067L0075012
4+4+4 PFD9067L0075008 PFD9067L0075013
2 PFD9067L0100013 PFD9067L0100020
4 PFD9067L0100015 PFD9067L0100021
4+2 PFD9067L0100016 PFD9067L0100022
1:100 1:100
4+4 PFD9067L0100017 PFD9067L0100023
4+4+2 PFD9067L0100018 PFD9067L0100024
4+4+4 PFD9067L0100019 PFD9067L0100025
2 PFD9067L0150007 PFD9067L0150012
4 PFD9067L0150005 PFD9067L0150013
4+2 PFD9067L0150008 PFD9067L0150014
1:150 1:150
4+4 PFD9067L0150009 PFD9067L0150015
4+4+2 PFD9067L0150010 PFD9067L0150016
4+4+4 PFD9067L0150011 PFD9067L0150017
2 PFD9067L0200004 PFD9067L0200009
4 PFD9067L0200005 PFD9067L0200010
4+2 PFD9067L0200006 PFD9067L0200011
1:200 1:200
4+4 PFD9067L0200002 PFD9067L0200012
4+4+2 PFD9067L0200007 PFD9067L0200013
4+4+4 PFD9067L0200008 PFD9067L0200014
2 PFD9067L0250012 PFD9067L0250016
4 PFD9067L0250013 PFD9067L0250010
4+2 PFD9067L0250009 PFD9067L0250017
1:250 1:250
4+4 PFD9067L0250001 PFD9067L0250028
4+4+2 PFD9067L0250014 PFD9067L0250019
4+4+4 PFD9067L0250015 PFD9067L0250011
2 PFD9067L0300004 PFD9067L0300010
4 PFD9067L0300005 PFD9067L0300011
4+2 PFD9067L0300006 PFD9067L0300012
1:300 1:300
4+4 PFD9067L0300007 PFD9067L0300013
4+4+2 PFD9067L0300008 PFD9067L0300014
4+4+4 PFD9067L0300009 PFD9067L0300015
2 PFD9067L0450001 PFD9067L0450008
4 PFD9067L0450003 PFD9067L0450002
4+2 PFD9067L0450004 PFD9067L0450009
1:450 1:450
4+4 PFD9067L0450005 PFD9067L0450010
4+4+2 PFD9067L0450006 PFD9067L0450011
4+4+4 PFD9067L0450007 PFD9067L0450012
247
TOP
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A16 A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A7
A9
A9
A11
A10
A12
A13
A14
A15
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Standard cam sets”, “Potentiometers, encoders and sensors” and
“Accessories”.
248
TOP
COMPONENTS
Ref. Drawing No. and type of cams No. and type of switches Code
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
249
TOP
4
A3 Support for potentiometer PA020000
Accessories
250
TOP
Accessories
S2
Legend
Z Number of teeth
M Module
L1
Dp Primitive diameter
ØDi
ØD2
De External diameter
Di Internal diameter
ØD1
ØD3
a Addendum
d Dedendum
ØDe 1x45°
Alpha Pressure angle
S S1
Code Z M Dp De Di a d S Alpha D1 D2 D3 S1 S2 L1
PRSL0915PI 8 20.00 160.00 200.00 113.20 20.00 23.40 31.41 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0912PI 10 12.00 120.00 144.00 92.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0913PI 10 14.00 140.00 168.00 107.24 14.00 16.38 21.99 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.60 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0914PI 10 16.00 160.00 192.00 122.67 16.00 18.67 25.13 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
PRSL0917PI 11 6.00 66.00 78.00 51.96 6.00 7.02 9.42 20.00 12.00 4.00 19.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0916PI 12 5.00 60.00 70.00 48.30 5.00 5.83 7.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 20.00 23.00 8.00 7.00
PRSL0918PI 12 8.00 96.00 112.00 77.28 8.00 9.36 12.56 20.00 12.00 3.90 21.50 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0911PI 12 10.00 120.00 140.00 96.67 10.00 11.67 15.71 20.00 12.00 4.00 25.00 23.50 10.00 7.00
PRSL0944PI 12 12.00 144.00 168.00 116.00 12.00 14.00 18.85 20.00 12.00 4.00 24.00 23.00 10.00 7.00
251
TOP
M Module
13 Dp Primitive diameter
4 De External diameter
12
Di Internal diameter
6 a Addendum
7
d Dedendum
Code Z M Dp De Di a d Alpha
PRSL0857PI 8 18.00 144.00 180.00 102.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0855PI 8 24.00 192.00 240.00 136.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0992PI 9 10.00 90.00 110.00 66.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0879PI 9 16.00 144.00 176.00 106.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0854PI 9 18.00 162.00 198.00 120.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0871PI 9 20.00 180.00 220.00 133.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0849PI 9 24.00 216.00 264.00 160.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0846PI 10 10.00 100.00 120.00 76.67 10.00 11.67 20.00
PRSL0993PI 10 18.00 180.00 216.00 138.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0970PI 10 22.00 220.00 264.00 168.52 22.00 25.74 20.00
PRSL0856PI 10 24.00 240.00 288.00 184.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0861PI 11 12.00 132.00 156.00 104.00 12.00 14.00 20.00
PRSL0998PI 11 18.00 198.00 234.00 156.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0997PI 11 20.00 220.00 260.00 173.36 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0859PI 11 24.00 264.00 312.00 204.00 24.00 30.00 20.00
PRSL0863PI 12 14.00 168.00 196.00 133.00 14.00 17.50 20.00
PRSL0897PI 12 16.00 192.00 224.00 154.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0972PI 12 18.00 216.00 252.00 173.88 18.00 21.06 20.00
PRSL0845PI 12 20.00 240.00 280.00 193.34 20.00 23.32 20.00
PRSL0878PI 12 24.00 288.00 336.00 232.00 24.00 28.00 20.00
PRSL0860PI 13 6.00 78.00 90.00 63.00 6.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0853PI 13 12.00 156.00 178.59 126.00 11.29 15.00 20.00
PRSL0898PI 13 16.00 208.00 240.00 170.67 16.00 18.66 20.00
PRSL0862PI 14 10.00 140.00 169.00 125.00 15.00 7.50 20.00
PRSL0896PI 14 16.00 224.00 256.00 186.67 16.00 18.67 20.00
PRSL0999PI 14 18.00 252.00 288.00 210.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0848PI 14 20.00 280.00 320.00 233.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0858PI 15 18.00 270.00 306.00 228.00 18.00 21.00 20.00
PRSL0847PI 16 20.00 320.00 360.00 273.33 20.00 23.33 20.00
PRSL0973PI 17 10.00 170.00 190.00 145.00 10.00 12.50 22.89
PRSL0974PI 17 14.00 238.00 266.00 203.00 14.00 17.50 22.89
PRSL0851PI 20 6.00 120.00 132.00 105.00 6.00 7.50 22.89
PRSL0844PI 25 1.00 25.00 27.00 22.50 1.00 1.25 22.89
252
TOP
TOP - REQUEST FORM FOR NON STANDARD LIMIT SWITCH
Instructions Standard cam sets 4
(See next pages for list of components and legends) Cam set code
1 Version: tick the required version. Output 1
2 SIL 1 certiied: tick the box if you require SIL 1 certiied units. Output 2
Version C 2
1
Version X C
Output 3
Version with anti-moisture plug C Cam code Switch code
6
ATTENTION: Top XL with cover rise are not cULus certiied.
5
SIL 1 certiied 2 4
Code
Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 50 50
Standard shaft 7
Revolution ratio 3 7 7
Flexible shaft
Ø12h7
Ø12h7
253
TOP
No. & type of switches No. & type of cams Code Description Code
2 cams A FCL20001 Potentiometer 10 kΩ with support PA020001
2 x PRSL0110XX Cams A+C FCL20003
Potentiometer 10 kΩ mechanical stop with PA020002
2 cams C FCL20005 support
4 Cams D+D+B+F FCL40001 Potentiometer 10 kΩ ±10% 4 pins with support PA020003
5 Legend - Switches
PRSL0110XX PRSL0111XX
1NO+1NC 1NC
13 21 11
14 22 12
Code for PRSL0110XX Switching angle with Code for PRSL0111XX Switching angle with
Cam switches PRSL0110XX switches PRSL0111XX
254
TOP
6 Coniguration table
The following table shows possible conigurations of Top and Top XL.
When it is not possible to mount a set of cams together with a potentiometer/encoder, the table shows «Not available.»
When the standard cover PA090018 is not high enough to hold the elements mounted inside the limit switch, it is possible to use the cover rise
PRSL0707PI (the table shows «Top XL»).
In all other cases it is possible to mount the sets of cams and potentiometer/encoder with the standard cover PA090018 (the table shows «Top»).
Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams Set of cams
4
with 2 switches with 3 switches with 4 switches with 5 switches with 6 switches
Set of cams +
Top Top Top Top XL Top XL
Yankee1
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Not available Not available
PA020001
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Not available Not available
PA020002
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Top XL Not available
PA020003
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Top XL Not available
PA020004
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Top XL Not available
PA020005
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Not available Not available
PA020006
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Not available Not available
PA020007
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Not available Not available
PA020008
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Top XL Not available
PA030001
Set of cams +
Top Top XL Top XL Top XL Not available
PA030002
255
TOP
REMARKS
4
03092018
256
POSITION
LIMIT SWITCHES 5
257
258
ARKE
ARKE
Position limit switch 5
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Designed to guarantee excellent performance in the most • Cross rods with 4 maintained positions every 90°, cross or T
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
challenging operating conditions. rods with 3 maintained position every 90°, single rod or rod
• 2 ixing holes. with roller with 65° movements and spring return.
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • 2 slow action switches with 1NC+1NC staggered contacts or
• Mechanical life of switches: 2 million operations. 2 slow action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts.
• IP protection degree: Arke is classiied IP65, IP66, IP67 with • 3 outputs for cable clamps to reduce installation time and
dedicated cable clamp M20. make wiring easier.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -40°C to +80°C.
• Aluminium rods with 6x8 mm section and enclosure and
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
259
ARKE
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP65, IP66, IP67 with dedicated cable clamp M20
Insulation category Class II
1.5 m/s (standard)
Maximum operation speed
3 m/s (on request)
Mechanical life 5x106 operations
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
11 21 13 21
Scheme
12 22 14 22
260
ARKE
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
90°
69.5
80
200 / 300
8.5 7.5
129
6.5
126
105.5
74
61 45
75
81
Ø32
min 70 - max 150
80
172
8.5 7.5
129
126
6.5
105.5
74
61 45
75 69.5
81
261
ARKE
The limit switches are equipped with switches PRSL1650XX with 1NC+1NC staggered contacts .
Other conigurations are available on request. 12 22
5 Actuating travel
A2 B2 B1 0 A1 A2 B2
A1 B1 B2 A2 0 B1 A1 0 A2 B2 A1 B1
0 A1 B2 A2 B1 0
3 maintained positions
13 21
The limit switches are equipped with switches PRSL1652XX with 1NO+1NC contacts .
Other conigurations are available on request.
14 22
90° 0° 90°
11-12 11-12 11-12
A 21-22 A 21-22 A 21-22
11-12 11-12 11-12 Cross rods
B 21-22 B 21-22 B 21-22 F201110002
2 x 200 mm
B1 0 A1
B2 A2 0 B1 A1 0 A2 B2 T rods
1 x 200 mm F201110006
1 x 300 mm
A1 B2 A2 B1
Spring return
13 21
The limit switches are equipped with switches PRSL1652XX with 1NO+1NC contacts .
Other conigurations are available on request.
14 22
262
TANGO
TANGO
Position limit switch 5
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Modern design and overall dimensions studied to facilitate • Slow action switches with 1NC or 1NO contacts.
installation and maintenance operations. • Available with 2, 3 or 4 switches and different rod lengths.
• 4 ixing holes.
• Rods with 4 maintained positions every 60°.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations.
CERTIFICATIONS
• Operation frequency: 3600 operations / hour max.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
263
TANGO
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class II
Operation frequency 3600 operations/hour max
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
Scheme
14 12
264
TANGO
MAXIMUM ACTUATING DIMENSIONS
30°
Actuating point 93 mm
Actuating point 76 mm
Actuating point 60 mm
150 mm rod
100 mm rod
125 mm rod
200 mm
250 mm
300 mm
Rod length
103.3
76.3
6 58 58
8
° 60
11.86
60 °
6.2
100
29.9
12.4
200
98.8
91.9
112
62
100
Ø6.2
30
31.5 54
70 77.3 6
83.3
265
TANGO
LIMIT SWITCHES
11
The limit switches are equipped with 1NC slow action switches PRSL1001PI .
12
3 300 mm PF48030001
300 mm PF48040001
4 250 mm PF48040006
200 mm PF48040007
266
TANGO
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
5
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A3
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches” and “Accessories”.
267
TANGO
COMPONENTS
Switches
5 1NO switch
14
PRSL1000PI
A2 11
Accessories
268
7551-7552
7551-7552
Position limit switch 5
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Designed to guarantee excellent performance in the most • 4 snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts or slow
challenging operating conditions. action switches with 1NC contact.
• Rods with 4 maintained positions every 90°. • 3 outputs for cable clamps to reduce installation time and
• 4 ixing holes. make wiring easier.
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations.
• Operation frequency: 3600 operations/hour max.
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
269
7551-7552
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP66 max. with speciic cable clamp M20
Insulation category Class I
Operation frequency 3600 operations/hour max
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
1NO+1NC 1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening (All NC contacts are of the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
13 21 11
Scheme
14 22 12
270
7551-7552
MAXIMUM ACTUATING DIMENSIONS
Rods with 4 maintained positions
• Pre-travel angle for rotation contact operation: 49°
• Maximum rotation angle for each maintained position: 90°
• Average angle for the mechanical tripping: 48°
• Maintained positions each: 90°
In order to ensure proper operations, the dimensions shall not be increased; anyhow, they can be decreased, taking into account 5
that the closer the impact point is to the center of the head, the higher the impact and the mechanical wear of rod and shaft are.
IMPORTANT: the maximum impact speed is 1.35 m/s, refering to the ideal impact points showed in the drawing.
30°
Actuating point 93 mm
Actuating point 70 mm
Actuating point 60 mm
150 mm rod
100 mm rod
125 mm rod
200 mm
250 mm
300 mm
Rod length
6
6
82
100
90°
45
5.5
200
9
125
143
126
94
9
4.5
69
75
90 95
271
7551-7552
LIMIT SWITCHES
13 21
The limit switches are equipped with 1NO+1NC snap action switches PRSL0036XX .
14 22
4 200 mm PF26755100
4 200 mm PF26755200
272
7551-7552
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A3
A3
A2
A2
A1
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of: “Switches” and “Accessories”.
273
7551-7552
COMPONENTS
Switches
A1 11
Accessories
A2
274
X-FSC / X-FRZ
X-FSC / X-FRZ
Position limit switch 5
FEATURES OPTIONS The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Operation frequency: 3600 operations/hour max. rods in 3 maintained positions, movement every 90°.
• IP protection degree: X-FSC and X-FRZ are classiied IP65 • X-FRZ has a single rod or a rod with roller with spring return
with speciic cable clamp M20. movement every 65°.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C.
• Enclosure and head in thermoplastic material.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
CERTIFICATIONS
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
• CE marking and EAC certiication.
275
X-FSC / X-FRZ
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP65 max. with speciic cable clamp M20
Insulation category Class II
Operation frequency 3600 operations/hour max
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
1NO+1NC 1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening (All NC contacts are of the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
13 21 11
Scheme
14 22 12
276
X-FSC / X-FRZ
MAXIMUM ACTUATING DIMENSIONS
T-type rod - Cross rod with 3 maintained positions
• Pre-travel angle for rotation contact operation: 49°
• Maximum rotation angle for each maintained position: 90°
• Average angle for the mechanical tripping: 48°
Rod - Rod and Roller
• Pre-travel angle for rotation contact operation: 24°
5
• Maximum rotation angle: 65°
Cross rod with 4 maintained positions
• Pre-travel angle for rotation contact operation: 49°
• Maximum rotation angle for each maintained position: 90°
• Average angle for the mechanical tripping: 48°
• Maintained positions each: 90°
In order to ensure proper operations, the dimensions shall not be increased; anyhow, they can be decreased, taking into account
that the closer the impact point is to the center of the head, the higher the impact and the mechanical wear of rod and shaft are.
IMPORTANT: the maximum impact speed is 1.35 m/s, refering to the ideal impact points showed in the drawing.
30°
Actuating point 93 mm
Actuating point 76 mm
Actuating point 60 mm
150 mm rod
100 mm rod
125 mm rod
200 mm
250 mm
300 mm
Rod length
277
X-FSC / X-FRZ
X-FSC
200 49
5 6 6
90°
100
72
200
5.3
9
7.5
40
113
95.3
64 38.5
62
X-FRZ
49
Ø3
2
72
172
5.3
9
7.5
40
113
64 38.5
62
278
X-FSC / X-FRZ
LIMIT SWITCHES X-FSC
13 21
Limit switches X-FSC are equipped with 1NO+1NC snap action switches PRSL0036XX .
14 22
279
X-FSC / X-FRZ
Limit switches X-FRZ are equipped with 1NO+1NC snap action switches PRSL0036XX .
14 22
280
X-FSC / X-FRZ
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A4
A4
A5
A3 A2
A2
A3
A1
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Switches” and “Accessories”.
281
X-FSC / X-FRZ
COMPONENTS
Switches
A1 11
Accessories
PF33_ _ _ _TE
A2 Head with cross rods Codes on request
PF33_ _ _ _TE
A3 Head with rod and roller Codes on request
282
INO
INO
Position limit switch 5
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Casing made of iber-glass reinforced UL-VO thermoplastic, • 10 different switches: snap action switches with 2NC or
zinc alloy (zama) or aluminum, featuring 2 or 4 ixing holes.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
1NO+1NC contacts, slow action simultaneous switches
• Casing available in different width and with different cable with 2NC or 2NO contacts, slow action break before make
entries: 30 mm with 1 cable entry, 35 mm wired, 40 mm with switches with 1NO+1NC, 1NO+2NC or 2NO+1NC contacts,
1 cable entry, 50 mm with 2 or 3 cable entries and 60 mm slow action make before break switches with 1NO+1NC
with 3 cable entries. contacts, and slow action simultaneous switches with 3NC
• Electrically separated contacts and positive opening NC and 3NO contacts.
contacts for safety functions*. • Heads in technopolymer, metal or aluminum featuring up to
• Mechanical life of switches: up to 30 million operations. 39 different types of actuators for a variety of applications.
• Operation frequency: 3600 operations/hour max.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
Fill in the “request form” (page 326, 327, 328) for accurate product
coniguration.
283
STANDARD INO
EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 60068-2-78 Environmental Testing - Part 2-78: Tests - Test Cab: Damp heat, steady state
Conformity to CE Standards
IEC 60068-2-11 Environmental Testing - Part 2: Tests - Test Ka: Salt Mist
IEC 60068-2-27 Environmental Testing - Part 2: Tests - Test Ea & guidance: Shock
IEC 60068-2-6 Environmental testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal)
IEC 60536 Classiication of Electrical and Electronic Equipment with Regard to Protection
Against Electric Shock
Storage -30°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C (-40°C/+70°C on request)
Technopolymer series IP65
IP protection degree
Metal and aluminum series IP66*
Technopolymer series Class II
Insulation category
Metal and aluminum series Class I
Shock resistance 50 g* (1/2 sinusoidal shock for 11 msec) without contact switching
Vibration resistance 25 g (10 ... 500 Hz) without contact switching > 100 μsec
Technopolymer series 0.1 mm (at closing point)
Accuracy (after 1x106 operations)
Metal and aluminum series 0.05 (at closing point)
Slow action 0.06 m/s
Max. actuating speed
Snap action 0.001 m/s
Operating position Any position
Series C01: width 30 mm in technopolymer with 1 cable entry
Series C02: width 30 mm in metal with 1 cable entry
Series C03: width 40 mm in technopolymer with 1 cable entry
Casing Series C04: width 40 mm in aluminum with 1 cable entry
Series C05: width 50 mm in technopolymer with 2 cable entries
Series C06: width 50 mm in metal with 3 cable entries
Series C07: width 60 mm in aluminum with 3 cable entries
PG 13.5
1/2” NPT
Cable entry PG 11*
M16 x 1.5*
M20 x 1.5
284
STANDARD INO
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD INO
4 A / 400 Vac / 50/60 Hz / AC15 - 1.8 A (for three-pole switches for Standard Ino with 40 mm and 60 mm casing)
Rated operational current 5
6 A / 24 Vdc / DC13 - 2.8 A (for three-pole switches for Standard Ino with 40 mm and 60 mm casing)
0.55 A / 125 Vdc / DC13
0.4 A / 250 Vdc / DC13 - 0.27 A (for three-pole switches for Standard Ino with 40 mm and 60 mm casing)
500 V (pollution degree 3), A600 Q600
Rated insulation voltage
400 V, A300 Q300 (for three-pole switches for Standard Ino with 30 mm and 50 mm casing)
Scheme
Switch type Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action
Make before break Break before make Break before make Simultaneous Simultaneous
Scheme
285
STANDARD INO
22 24.5
20 12.5
Ø4
5
4
PG13.5
PG11
53
M16X1.5
M20X1.5
30.3 15
30
5.4 15.5
7
6.4
7.4
60
74
67
PG13.5
1/2” NPT
M20x1.5
Ø5.4
30 17
41 30.5
40.5
22 12.5
20
Ø4
2 x PG13.5
2 x PG11
2 x M16x1.5
4
2 x M20x1.5
46
40
42
50
14
57
33
286
STANDARD INO
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm) - STANDARD INO IN METAL
Series C02 with 30 mm casing Series C06 with 50 mm casing
22 22
12.5
20 12.5 Ø5.2 20
Ø4
2
3 x PG13.5
3 x 1/2” NPT 5
3 x PG11
4
3 x M16x1.5 40
PG13.5 3 x M20x1.5 42
1/2” NPT
54.5
PG11
55
M16X1.5
M20X1.5
14.5 52 14
30.3
32.5 59 31.8
16
5.3
6.5
7.3
5
76.5
60
PG13.5
1/2” NPT
M20x1.5
Ø5.3
10
30 15
40 31
43
16
40
5.3 6
6.5
7.3
3 x PG13,5
3 x 1/2” NPT
3 x M20x1.5
65.5
62 15
43
287
STANDARD INO
010: nylon plunger 012: steel roller 014 021: nuts M18x1
011: steel plunger 013: nylon roller 02101: nuts M12x1
Code of technopolymer head
For series C01, C05 For series C01, C05 For series C01, C02, C05, For series C01, C02, C05,
C06 C06
111: steel plunger 112: steel roller
Code of metal head / /
For series C02, C06 For series C02, C06
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
288
STANDARD INO
Nylon roller lever on Nylon roller lever on
Nylon roller lever Nylon roller lever steel plunger with dust steel plunger with dust
protective cap protective cap
5
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
289
STANDARD INO
038: without dust 041: nylon roller 042 045: nylon roller
protective cap 043: steel roller 046: steel roller
039: with dust
Code of technopolymer head protective cap
For series C01, C02, C05, For series C01, C05 For series C01, C05 For series C01, C05
C06
141: nylon roller 142 145: nylon roller
Code of metal head / 143: steel roller 146: steel roller
For series C02, C06 For series C02, C06 For series C02, C06
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action break
before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
290
STANDARD INO
Adjustable toothed lever
Adjustable lever with Adjustable lever with
Ceramic rod lever (step 2 mm) with
Ø18 mm roller Ø50 mm rubber roller
Ø18 mm nylon roller
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
291
STANDARD INO
Adjustable toothed
Adjustable toothed lever Adjustable lever with Nylon actuator
lever (step 2 mm) with
(step 2 mm) with adjustable Ø50 mm with stainless
adjustable Ø50 mm
Ø50 mm rubber roller rubber roller steel spring
rubber roller
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
292
STANDARD INO
Stainless steel spring Adjustable 3x3 square
Adjustable Ø3 mm rod Adjustable Ø6 mm rod
actuator steel rod
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
293
STANDARD INO
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action /
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3
slow action /
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5
slow action
break before make /
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
slow action /
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
294
STANDARD INO
HEADS FOR LIMIT SWITCHES STANDARD INO IN TECHNOPOLYMER WITH 40 mm CASING
(SERIES C03)
Plunger with
Plain plunger Ball plunger Roller plunger dust protective cap
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
295
STANDARD INO
219 231: Ø22 mm nylon roller 235: Ø22 mm nylon roller 241: nylon roller
232: Ø22 mm stainless 236: Ø22 mm stainless 242: stainless steel roller
steel roller steel roller 243: steel bearing
Code of technopolymer head 233: Ø22 mm steel 237: Ø22 mm steel
bearing bearing
For series C03 For series C03 For series C03 For series C03
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
296
STANDARD INO
Nylon actuator
Lever with Ø50 mm Adjustable lever with Adjustable lever with with stainless
rubber roller Ø22 mm roller Ø50 mm rubber roller steel spring
For series C03 For series C03 For series C03 For series C03
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
297
STANDARD INO
For series C03 For series C03 For series C03 For series C03
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
298
STANDARD INO
Multidirectional nylon actuator with Stainless steel spring multidirectional actuator
stainless steel spring
292 293
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
299
STANDARD INO
HEADS FOR LIMIT SWITCHES STANDARD INO IN ALUMINUM WITH 40 mm CASING (SERIES
C04) AND 60 mm CASING (SERIES C07)
311
Code of technopolymer head / / /
For series C04, C07
413
Code of metal head / / /
For series C04, C07
511 512 513
Code of aluminum head /
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
300
STANDARD INO
Plunger with Ø12 mm Stainless steel lateral
Plunger with Stainless steel
steel roller and plunger with
dust protective cap lateral plunger
dust protective cap Ø12 mm vertical roller
414 419
Code of metal head / /
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
521 522
Code of aluminum head / /
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
301
STANDARD INO
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
302
STANDARD INO
Nylon actuator
Adjustable Ø22 mm Adjustable Ø50 mm Stainless steel spring
with stainless steel
roller lever rubber roller lever actuator
spring
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
303
STANDARD INO
Multidirectional nylon
Stainless steel spring
Adjustable rod Adjustable Ø6 mm rod actuator with stainless
multidirectional actuator steel spring
392
Code of technopolymer head / / /
For series C04, C07
471: Ø3 mm stainless 472: nylon rod
steel rod 474: iber-glass rod / /
Code of metal head 473: Ø3 mm iber-glass rod
475: 3x3 mm metal rod
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
571: Ø3 mm stainless 572: nylon rod 591
steel rod 574: iber-glass rod /
Code of aluminum head 573: Ø3 mm iber-glass rod
575: 3x3 mm metal rod
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
14 22
1NO+1NC
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
304
STANDARD INO
Multidirectional nylon Stainless steel spring Stainless steel spring
actuator with stainless Pull action with ring
multidirectional actuator multidirectional actuator
steel spring
393
Code of technopolymer head / / /
For series C04, C07
/ / / /
Code of metal head
For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07 For series C04, C07
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action
break before make
14 22
1NO+1NC
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
13 23
Switch code B1
slow action
simultaneous
2NO 14 24
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action /
2NC
12 22
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 33
Switch code B9
slow action
simultaneous
3NO 14 24 34
305
DOUBLE LEVER INO
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
Series in technopolymer IP65 max. with speciic cable clamp M20
IP protection degree
Series in aluminum IP66 max. with speciic cable clamp M20
Series in technopolymer Class II
Insulation category
Series in aluminum Class I
Operation frequency 3600 operations/hour max
Cable entry Cable clamp M20
Operating position Any position
Series PF25: width 40 mm in aluminum with 1 cable entry
Casing
Series PF33: width 64 mm in technopolymer with 3 cable entries
1NO+1NC 1NC
(All NC contacts are of (All NC contacts are of
Contacts 1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC the positive opening the positive opening
operation type ) operation type )
14 22 14 22 13 21 11
Scheme
13 21 13 21 14 22 12
306
DOUBLE LEVER INO
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm) - DOUBLE LEVER INO
Series PF25 with 40 mm casing
5.5
6.4
7.5
5
60
72.5
Ø5.5
40 40.5 30
43
40
5.3 31
9
7.5
80
64 38.5
69.8
307
DOUBLE LEVER INO
14 22
1 switch PRSL0025XX 1-2
70° 0 70° Series PF25
snap action 3-4
1NO+1NC 13 21
18° 18° Code PF25768100
14 22
1 switch PRSL0031XX 70° 18° 18° 70° Series PF25
slow action 1-2
3-4
1NO+1NC 36° 0 36° Code PF25768300
13 21
13 21
1 switch PRSL0036XX 1-2
70° 0 70° Series PF33
snap action 3-4
1NO+1NC 14 22
18° 18°
Code PF33787100
13 21 70° 0 70°
2 switches PRSL0036XX 1-2 Series PF33
snap action 2x 3-4
18° 18°
1NO+1NC 14 22
1-2
3-4 Code PF33787200
2 switches PRSL0036XX
13 21 0 18° 70°
1-2 Series PF33
snap action 2x 3-4
70° 18° 0
1NO+1NC 1-2
14 22 3-4 Code PF33787400
2 switches PRSL0037XX 11
70° 0 70° Series PF33
slow action 1-2
2x 12° 12°
1NC 1-2
12 Code PF33787700
308
WIRED INO
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES - WIRED INO
Series C21 30 mm - metal - with connector AMP Series C22 35 mm - technopolymer - with connector M12
EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
Conformity to CE Standards EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
IEC 60536 Classiication of Electrical and Electronic Equipment with Regard to Protection
Against Electric Shock
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP67
Technopolymer series Class II
Insulation category
Metal series Class I
Switching frequency 3600 cycles/hour
Mechanical life 10 x 106 operations
Series C20: width 30 mm in technopolymer
Series C21: width 30 mm in metal
Casing
Series C22: width 35 mm in technopolymer
Series C23: width 35 mm in metal
Series C20 and C22: 4 x 0.75 mm2 PVC
Wires
Series C21 and C23: 5 x 0.75 mm2 PVC
Cable length from 1 m (standard) to 12 m
Halogen free PUR cable from 1 m to 12 m
Options Dynamic PUR cable from 1 m to 12 m
Connector M12
Connector AMP
309
WIRED INO
Cable speciications Cable 4xAWG18 Cable 5xAWG18 Cable 4xAWG18 Cable 5xAWG18 - -
PVC style 2517 PVC style 2517 PUR style 20668 PUR style 20668
Thermal current 10 A 4A 10 A
10 A 500 V 4 A 500 V 10 A 500 V
Short-circuit protection type gG type gG type gG
10 A / 24 V / AC15 4 A / 24 V / AC15 10 A / 24 V / AC15
6 A / 120 V / AC15 4 A / 120 V / AC15 6 A / 120 V / AC15
1NO+1NC 1NO+1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive opening operation (All NC contacts are of the positive opening operation
type )* type )*
Scheme
30 35
20 30
16 25 16
Ø4.3
Ø4.3
9
49
49
40
40
Ø7
4.5
31.5
Ø7
310
WIRED INO
HEADS FOR LIMIT SWITCHES WIRED INO
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
311
WIRED INO
Code of head
For series C20, C21, C22, For series C20, C21, C22, For series C20, C22 For series C20, C21, C22,
C23 C23 C23
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
312
WIRED INO
Adjustable toothed lever Adjustable lever with Nylon actuator with
(step 2 mm) with Adjustable rod
Ø18 mm metal roller stainless steel spring
Ø18 mm nylon roller
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
For series C20, C21, C22, C23 For series C20, C21, C22, C23 For series C20, C21, C22, C23
Switch code F0 13 21
slow action
break before make / /
1NO+1NC
14 22
313
SAFETY INO
Series C51 - with separate actuator Series C55 - with rope Series C01 - with reset button
EN 60947-5-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electromechanical control circuit devices
EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear
EN 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures
Conformity to CE Standards IEC 61140 Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and equipment
EN ISO 14119 Safety of machinery - Interlocking devices associated with guards - Principles for
design and selection (Available only for separate actuator and hinge mount limit switches)
EN 60947-5-5 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Control circuit devices and switching
elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function (Available only
for limit switches with rope and reset)
Storage -30°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
Technopolymer series IP65
IP protection degree
Metal and aluminum series IP66
Technopolymer series Class II
Insulation category
Metal and aluminum series Class I
1 x 106 operations
Mechanical life
With wire head 500,000 operations
Operating position Any position
Series C50: width 30 mm in technopolymer with 1 cable entry
Series C51: width 30 mm in metal with 1 cable entry
Series C52: width 40 mm in technopolymer with 1 cable entry
Series C53: width 40 mm in aluminum with 1 cable entry
Series C54: width 50 mm in technopolymer with 2 cable entries
Series C55: width 50 mm in metal with 3 cable entries
Involucro
Series C56: width 50 mm in technopolymer with 3 cable entries
Series C57: width 60 mm in aluminum with 3 cable entries
Series C01: with manual reset button, width 30 mm in technopolymer with 1 cable entry
Series C02: with manual reset button, width 30 mm in metal with 1 cable entry
Series C05: with manual reset button, width 50 mm in technopolymer with 2 cable entries
Series C06: with manual reset button, width 50 mm in metal with 3 cable entries
PG 13.5
1/2” NPT
Cable entry PG 11*
M16 x 1.5*
M20 x 1.5
* Not available on all versions.
314
SAFETY INO
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION - SAFETY INO
Wires 1 o 2 x 0.75 ... 2.5 mm2 (two-pole contacts), 1 o 2 x 0.34 ... 1.5 (three-pole contacts)
Scheme
Switch type Slow action Slow action Slow action Slow action
Make before break Break before make Break before make Simultaneous
Scheme
315
SAFETY INO
5.4 15.5
22 24.5
20 12.5
5
6.4
Ø4
7.4
4
PG13,5
60
1/2” NPT
74
67
PG13.5 M20x1.5
PG11
53
M16X1.5
M20X1.5 Ø5.4
30.3 15 30 17
30 41 30.5
40.5
22 12.5
20
Ø4
2 x PG13.5
2 x PG11
2 x M16x1.5
4
2 x M20x1.5
46
40
42
50
14
57
33
9.1
Ø5.5 0.5
7.2
7 7.5
3 x M20x1.5
Ø5.5
74
49.6
40
20.5
52.5 14.6
31.6
316
SAFETY INO
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm) - SAFETY INO IN METAL
Series C51 with 30 mm casing Series C55 with 50 mm casing
Series C02 with manual reset button and 30 mm casing Series C06 with manual reset button and 50 mm casing
22 22
12.5
20 12.5 Ø5.2 20
Ø4
5
2
3 x PG13.5
3 x 1/2” NPT
3 x PG11
4
3 x M16x1.5 40
PG13.5 3 x M20x1.5 42
1/2” NPT
54.5
PG11
55
M16X1.5
M20X1.5
14.5 52 14
30.3
32.5 59 31.8
16
5.3
6.5
7.3
5
76.5
60
PG13.5
1/2” NPT
M20x1.5
Ø5.3
10
30 15
40 31
43
16
40
5.3 6
6.5
7.3
3 x PG13,5
3 x 1/2” NPT
3 x M20x1.5
65.5
62 15
43
317
SAFETY INO
Adjustable head 90° Adjustable head 90° Adjustable head 90° Adjustable head 90°
with separate actuator with separate actuator with separate actuator with separate actuator
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action 2.7 3.8 4.4 5.5 4.4 5.5 4.4 5.5
break before make
4.1 5.8 5.8 5.8
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0 4.2 5.3 5.3 6.4 5.3 6.4 5.3 6.4
slow action
make before break 2.9 4.1 4.1 4.1
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action 3.5 4.6 3.3 4.4 3.3 4.4 3.3 4.4
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
11 21
4 5.1 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2 5.1 6.2
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC 2.4 3.5 3.5 3.5
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 2.6 3.7 3.9 5.0 3.9 5.0 3.9 5.0
slow action
break before make 5.1 5.2 5.2 5.2
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 2.6 3.7 3.9 5.0 3.9 5.0 3.9 5.0
slow action
break before make 4.1 5.2 5.2 5.2
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
2.3 3.4 3.8 4.9 3.8 4.9 3.8 4.9
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action \ \ \ \
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action \ \ \ \
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous \ \ \ \
3NC 12 22 32
318
SAFETY INO
Fully turnable head Zinc plated steel shaft Stainless steel shaft Zinc plated steel lever
with separate actuator for hinge mount for hinge mount for hinge mount
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action 2.7 3.8 12 28 74 12 28 74 12 28 74
break before make
4.1 22 22 22
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0 4.2 5.3 25 41 74 25 41 74 25 41 74
slow action
make before break 2.9 13 13 13
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2
slow action 3.5 4.6 15 31 74 15 31 74 15 31 74
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
11 21
4 5.1 29 35 74 29 35 74 29 35 74
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC 2.4 15 15 15
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 2.6 3.7 18 34 74 18 34 74 18 34 74
slow action
break before make 5.1 32 32 32
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 2.6 3.7 18 34 74 18 34 74 18 34 74
slow action
break before make 4.1 32 32 32
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7
2.3 3.4 18 34 74 18 34 74 18 34 74
slow action
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action \ \ \ \
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action \ \ \ \
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action \ \ \ \
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
319
SAFETY INO
Pull wire without reset Pull wire without reset Pull wire without reset Pull wire without reset
for simple stop for simple stop for simple stop for simple stop
Min. actuating force (N) or Initial 65 N, inal 85 N Initial 150 N, inal 215 N Initial 60 N, inal 80 N Initial 120 N, inal 160 N
torque (Nm) / for positive / 95 N / 230 N / 90 N / 170 N
opening
13 21
Switch code A0
snap action / / / /
1NO+1NC
14 22
Switch code C0 13 21
7 1.3 0 1.6 2.7 7 7 1.9 0 2.2 3.3 7 5.6 1.3 0 1.6 2.7 4 6 1.9 0 2.2 3.3 5.6
slow action
break before make 2.6 2.5 3.1 3.1 2.6 2.5 3.1 3.1
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break / / / /
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2 7 1.3 0 1.5 2.6 7 7 1.7 0 1.9 3 7 5.6 1.3 0 1.5 2.6 4 6 1.7 0 1.9 3 5.6
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action / / / /
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 7 1.5 0 1.5 2.6 7 5.6 1.5 0 1.5 2.6 4
slow action / /
break before make 2.9 2.4 2.9 2.4
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 7 1.5 0 1.5 2.6 7 5.6 1.5 0 1.5 2.6 4
slow action / /
break before make 2.9 2.4 2.9 2.4
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7 7 1.4 0 1.5 2.6 7 5.6 1.4 0 1.5 2.6 4
slow action
simultaneous / /
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 31 7 6
Switch code C6 1.7 0 2.1 3.2 7 1.7 0 2.1 3.2 5.6
slow action / 3.2 / 3.2
break before make 3.2 3.2
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8 7 1.7 0 2.1 3.2 7 6 1.7 0 2.1 3.2 5.6
slow action
simultaneous / /
3NC 12 22 32
320
SAFETY INO
Pull wire with reset for Pull wire with reset for Pull wire with reset for
emergency stop emergency stop emergency stop
Min. actuating force (N) or Initial 65 N, inal 85 N Initial 150 N, inal 215 N Initial 65 N, inal 85 N
torque (Nm) / for positive / 95 N / 230 N / 95 N
opening
13 21
Switch code A0
snap action / / /
1NO+1NC
14 22
Switch code C0 13 21
7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break / / /
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action / / /
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action /
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action /
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action /
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 31 7
Switch code C6 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action / /
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7
slow action
simultaneous / /
3NC 12 22 32
321
SAFETY INO
Pull wire with reset for Pull wire with reset for Pull wire with reset for
emergency stop emergency stop emergency stop
Min. actuating force (N) or Initial 150 N, inal 215 N Initial 60 N, inal 80 N Initial 120 N, inal 160 N
torque (Nm) / for positive / 230 N / 90 N / 170 N
opening
13 21
Switch code A0
snap action / / /
1NO+1NC
14 22
Switch code C0 13 21
7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action
break before make
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break / / /
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action
simultaneous
2NC 12 22
11 21
Switch code A2
snap action / / /
2NC
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action / /
break before make
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action / /
break before make
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action
simultaneous / /
3NC 12 22 32
13 23 31 7 5.6
Switch code C6 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 R3 0 R3 3.7 4
slow action /
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8 7 R2.1 0 R2.1 5.1 7 5.6 R3 0 R3 3.7 74
slow action /
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
322
SAFETY INO
Steel plunger with nylon Steel plunger with nylon Steel plunger with nylon
Steel plunger with reset roller with reset roller with reset roller with reset
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action 6.1 10.5 21.0 6.1 10.5 21.0
break before make
9.1 R16.5 9.1 R16.5
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2 1.6 3.1 5.6 3.1 5.9 9.6 6 10.2 21.0 6 10.2 21.0
slow action
simultaneous R4.2 R8.0 R16.5 R16.5
2NC 12 22
11 21
2.5 4.0 5.6 2.5 7.4 9.6 9.1 13.1 21.0 9.1 13.1 21.0
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC 1.3 R4.2 4.7 R8.0 5.1 R16.5 5.1 R16.5
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 3.6 6.4 9.6 6.9 11.8 21.0 6.9 11.8 21.0
slow action
break before make 6 R8.0 11 R16.5 11 R16.5
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 1.8 3.4 5.6 3.6 6.4 9.6 6.9 11.8 21.0 6.9 11.8 21.0
slow action
break before make 3.3 R4.2 6 R8.0 11 R16.5 11 R16.5
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7 3.6 6.4 9.6 6.9 11.8 21.0 6.9 11.8 21.0
slow action
simultaneous R4.2 R8.0 R16.5 R16.5
3NC 12 22 32
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action / / / /
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action / / / /
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action
simultaneous / / / /
3NC 12 22 32
323
SAFETY INO
Steel plunger with nylon roller with reset Lever with nylon roller with reset
838 841
Code of head
For series C05, C06 For series C01, C02, C05, C06
Switch code C0 13 21
slow action 10.9 18.5 32.0 22 37 74
break before make
16.1 R25.7 35 R62
1NO+1NC
14 22
13 21
Switch code D0
slow action
make before break
1NO+1NC 14 22
11 21
Switch code B2 10.1 17.8 32.0 20 37 74
slow action
simultaneous R25.7 R62
2NC 12 22
11 21
15.1 22.8 32.0 37 46 74
Switch code A2
snap action
2NC 8.5 R25.7 20 R62
12 22
11 21 33
Switch code C3 12.2 19.7 32.0 23 40 74
slow action
break before make 19 R25.7 39 R62
1NO+2NC 12 22 34
11 23 33
Switch code C5 12.2 19.7 32.0 23 40 74
slow action
break before make 19 R25.7 39 R62
2NO+1NC 12 24 34
11 21 31
Switch code B7 12.2 19.7 32.0 23 40 74
slow action
simultaneous R25.7 R62
3NC 12 22 32
13 21 31
Switch code C4
slow action / /
break before make
1NO+2NC 14 22 32
13 23 31
Switch code C6
slow action / /
break before make
2NO+1NC 14 24 32
11 21 31
Switch code B8
slow action / /
simultaneous
3NC 12 22 32
324
SAFETY INO
OPERATING KEYS FOR LIMIT SWITCHES SAFETY INO WITH SEPARATE ACTUATOR
5
Flat key
Bent key
Flat key
Bent key
Flat key
Legend
325
STANDARD INO
5
Casing Switches
A0 = snap action 1NO+1NC.
Series Material Width No. cable
entries C0 = slow action - break before make
C01 Technopolymer 30 mm 1 1NO+1NC.
D0 = slow action - make befor break
C02 Metal 30 mm 1
1NO+1NC.
C03 Technopolymer 40 mm 1 B2 = slow action - simultaneous 2NC.
C04 Aluminum 40 mm 1 B1 = slow action - simultaneous 2NO.
C05 Technopolymer 50 mm 2 A2 = snap action 2NC.
C3 = slow action - break before make
C06 Metal 50 mm 3 1NO+2NC.
C07 Aluminum 60 mm 3 (Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
C4 = slow action - break before make
1NO+2NC.
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
Type of cable entry
C5 = slow action - break before make
1 = for cable clamp thread PG13.5.
2NO+1NC.
2 = for cable clamp thread 1/2” NPT.
(Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
(On series C01 and C05 the thread results
C6 = slow action - break before make
from a plastic adapter).
2NO+1NC.
3 = for cable clamp thread PG11.
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
(Available only for series C01, C02, C05,
B7 = slow action - simultaneous 3NC.
C06).
(Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
4 = for cable clamp thread M16 x 1.5.
B8 = slow action - simultaneous 3NC.
(Available only for series C01, C02, C05,
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
C06).
B9 = slow action simultaneous 3NO.
5 = for cable clamp thread M20 x 1.5.
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
Operating heads
010 - 599 = operating heads
For series C01, C02, C05 and C06 refer to tables
from page 288 to page 294.
For series C03 refer to tables from page 295 to
page 299.
For series C04 and C07 refer to tables from page
300 to page 305.
Limit switch Standard Ino is also available for operational temperature -40°C/+70°C on request.
Instructions
Fill in the boxes with the numbers corresponding to the speciications required, thus obtaining the limit switch code, as shown in
the example below.
C02 5 038 A0
326
WIRED INO
WIRED INO - REQUEST FORM FOR LIMIT SWITCH
5
Casing Direction of electric connection
Series Material Width Series C20 and C21 Series C22 and C23
R = right (standard) C = center (standard)
C20 Technopolymer 30 mm C = center R = right
C21 Metal 30 mm L = left L = left
C22 Technopolymer 35 mm
C23 Metal 35 mm
Switches
E0 = snap action 1NO+1NC.
F0 = slow action - break before make
Operating heads
1NO+1NC.
611 - 693 = operating heads
Refer to tables from page 311 to
page 313.
Instructions
Fill in the boxes with the numbers corresponding to the speciications required, thus obtaining the limit switch code, as shown in
the example below.
C20 W 612 E0 01 R
327
SAFETY INO
5
Casing Switches
Series Material Width No. cable A0 = snap action 1NO+1NC.
entries C0 = slow action - break before make
C50 Technopolymer 30 mm 1 1NO+1NC.
C51 Metal 30 mm 1 D0 = slow action - make before break
1NO+1NC.
C52 Technopolymer 40 mm 1 B2 = slow action - simultaneous 2NC.
C53 Aluminum 40 mm 1 A2 = snap action 2NC.
C54 Technopolymer 50 mm 2 C3 = slow action - break before make
1NO+2NC.
C55 Metal 50 mm 3
(Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
C56 Technopolymer 50 mm 3 C4 = slow action - break before make
C57 Aluminum 60 mm 3 1NO+2NC.
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
With manual reset C5 = slow action - break before make
C01 Technopolymer 30 mm 1 2NO+1NC.
C02 Metal 30 mm 1 (Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
C6 = slow action - break before make
C05 Technopolymer 50 mm 2 2NO+1NC.
C06 Metal 50 mm 3 (Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
B7 = slow action - simultaneous 3NC.
(Available for series C01, C02, C05 and C06).
B8 = slow action - simultaneous 3NC.
(Available for series C03, C04 and C07).
Type of cable entry
1 = for cable clamp thread PG13.5.
(Not available for series C56).
2 = for cable clamp thread 1/2” NPT.
(Not available for series C56). Operating heads
(On series C50, C54, C01 and C05 the thread 710 - 841 = operating heads
results from a plastic adapter). For series from C50 to C57 refer to tables from
3 = for cable clamp thread PG11. page 318 to page 322.
(Available only for series C50, C51, C54, C55, For manual reset series C01, C02, C05 and C06
C01, C02, C05, C06). refer to tables from page 323 to page 324.
4 = for cable clamp thread M16 x 1.5.
(Available only for series C50, C51, C54, C55,
C01, C02, C05, C06).
5 = for cable clamp thread M20 x 1.5.
Instructions
Fill in the boxes with the numbers corresponding to the speciications required, thus obtaining the limit switch code, as shown in
the example below.
C50 5 771 B8
21092018
328
INO
REMARKS
329
330
SLIP RING
COLLECTORS 6
331
332
10A
10A
Slip ring collector 6
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Suitable for transmitting current with 50/60 Hz supply • Available with driving slots.
frequency. • Available with coupling flange.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C.
CERTIFICATIONS
• CE marking and EAC certiication.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
333
10A
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 00
Insulation category Class I
Operating positions Any position
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
334
10A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
120°
26.5 40° 30°
8
13.2 4.6 11.3 0.8 16
Ø20.2 11
Ø56.5 6
8 30°
60°
8
4.6
0.8
4.6 13.2
80.3
40°
31.8
26.5
Ø35
8.2
0.8
6
4.
30°
8
0.8 11.3
25 30
55 52 7 36 20
120° 40° 30°
107 63
26.5 8
120° 40° 30°
13.2 4.6
10.5 0.8 16 R44
8 11
30°
8
4.6
60°
0.8
R28.5
13.2
26.5
80.5
Ø35
40°
0.8
4.6
Ø57
6
8 4. R44 30°
0.8 11.3
7 36 20
28.5 51
120° 40° 30°
335
10A
REMARKS
6
03092018
336
10A/30A
10A/30A
Slip ring collector 6
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Suitable for transmitting current with 50/60 Hz frequency. • Up to 40 rings coupled with brushes.
• The enclosure has small downward holes for air circulation • Available with 30A line rings only or with 30A line rings and
and to prevent problems due to moisture. 10A auxiliary rings.
• The lower support plate is provided with three holes to drain • Fitted with phosphor bronze or graphite brushes.
any moisture that may form inside the unit.
• The enclosure is made of shock-resistant thermoplastic
material to prevent contact with live electrical parts.
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
337
10A/30A
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 22
Insulation category Class I
Operating positions Any position
Cable clamps M20
Cable entry
Cable clamps M25
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
338
10A/30A
STANDARD SLIP RING COLLECTORS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
26.5 A 80±5
135 C
5.3
S T W X
Ø8
6
63
126
140
140
Ø52
178
65
63
89
Ø8
B Y 60 Z
6
R2
No. of No. rings Cable clamps type and position Dimensions (mm)
rings 10A 30A Code
S T W X Y Z A B C
1 4 M20 - M20 - - - PF2305B001 195 265 108
2 4 M20 - M20 - - - PF2306B003 211 281 124
3 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2307B002 211 281 124
4 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2308B001 227 297 140
5 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2309B001 227 297 140
6 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2310B001 243 313 156
7 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2311B001 243 313 156
8 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2312B001 259 329 172
9 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2313B002 259 329 172
10 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2314B001 275 345 188
11 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2315B002 275 345 188
12 4 M20 M20 M20 - - M20 PF2316B001 291 361 204
Max No. of rings: 40 483 553 396
30A rings
339
10A/30A
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A1
6
A2
A3
A4
A5
A2
A6
A2
A7
A8
A10 A9
A11
A12
A5
A13
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Brushes and rings”, “Cable clamps” and “Accessories”.
340
10A/30A
COMPONENTS
Cable clamps
Accessories
A1 Nut PRSL4010PE
341
10A/30A
Brushes
Graphite
Phosphor bronze
Instructions
- Write the number of 30A and 10A rings and the type of
brushes required.
- Write the input and output length of the tube required, when
different from the length showed in the overall dimensions.
- Write the type of cable clamps required on the upper cover
and on the lower plate.
Remarks
03092018
342
50A
50A
Slip ring collector 6
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Suitable for transmitting current with 50/60 Hz supply • Up to sixteen 50A line rings coupled with brushes.
frequency.
• The enclosure has small downward holes for air circulation
and to prevent problems due to moisture.
CERTIFICATIONS
• The lower support plate is provided with three holes to drain
• CE marking and EAC certiication.
any moisture that may form inside the unit.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
343
50A
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 22
Insulation category Class I
Operating positions Any position
Cable clamps M20
Cable entry
Cable clamps M25
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
344
50A
STANDARD SLIP RING COLECTORS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
A 70±5
Ø52
108
Ø12
44 C
B
T S
75
65
203
128
Y Z
150 90
345
50A
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A1
6 A2
A3
A4
A5
A2
A8 A6
A2
A9 A7
A8
A10
A3
A11
Refer to the following tables for descriptions of components: “Brushes and rings”, “Cable clamps” and “Accessories”.
346
50A
COMPONENTS
Cable clamps
Accessories
A1 Nut PRSL4010PE
A5 Cover PRSL5680PI
347
50A
6
Tube length
1 M20
2 M25
Instructions
- Write the number of 50A rings required.
- Write the input and output length of the tube required, when
different from the length showed in the overall dimensions.
- Write the type of cable clamps required on the upper cover
and on the lower plate.
Remarks
03092018
348
300A/500A
300A/500A
Slip ring collector 6
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Suitable for transferring DC current for data and control • High degree of customization thanks to fully modular
applications. construction system.
• It supports the major high speed data transmission
protocols: Ethernet CAT5, Proibus, Proinet, LAN, Can-BUS,
Can-Open.
CERTIFICATIONS
• Silver or golden signal rings.
• CE marking.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
349
300A/500A
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -20°C/+60°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -20°C/+60°C
IP protection degree IP 65
Insulation category Class I
Operating positions Any position
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ethernet CAT 5
ProiBus
ProiNet
Data transmission protocol
LAN
CAN-Bus
CANOpen
Maximum speed 100 Mbit/s
350
300A/500A
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
300A
4
17
20
86.5
Ring cable output 6
Ø1
8
03
0
Ø10
Ø13
500A
60
Cable input
collector without sheath
80
Ø1
Ø125
Ø220
N°4 x M10
351
300A/500A
Rotation speed
6
Cable output Rotor Continuous rotation Intermittent rotation
Ring side Ring side Works from a standstill
Operational voltage
Type of installation
Inner free diameter
Duty cycle
IP protection degree
Horizontal - Free Horizontal - With support
Ambient temperature (°C)
No. of connections Operating current (A) Voltage supply (V) Cable type Cable section Duty cycle
Ground
Power
Power
Power
Power
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
Remarks
03092018
352
300A/500A
REMARKS
353
354
FOOTSWITCHES 7
355
356
6100/6200
6100/6200
Footswitch 7
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
FEATURES OPTIONS
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with • Available with standard protection cover or large cover for
standard EN 418. safety shoes (6100 version).
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • Single or double footswitches ixed on a metal plate, with
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. emergency mushroom pushbutton.
• IP protection degree: footswitch 6100/6200 is classiied • Special footswitch design for pneumatic valve with ixing
IP53. plate (6100 version).
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -25°C to +70°C. • It may be itted with “lock-release” device used for keeping
• Made of plastic material or die-cast aluminium. the pedal pressed or with safety device to prevent accidental
• Materials and components are shock and wear resistant. operation.
• Snap or slow action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts, or
slow action switches with 2NO+2NC contacts.
CERTIFICATIONS
• CE marking.
357
6100/6200
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+70°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+70°C
IP protection degree IP 53
Insulation category Class I
Cable entry Cable clamps M20
13 21 13 21 13 23 31 41
Scheme
14 22 14 22 14 24 32 42
358
6100/6200
FOOTSWITCH 6100 - OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
7
Simple
* with standard protection
( ) with large protection
*43 (68)
*118 (143)
*113 (132)
*122 (141)
112
99
75
*234 (245)
*248 (259)
Double
* with standard protection
( ) with large protection
248
*75 (100)
*128 (153)
251
265
291
359
6100/6200
Simple
55
130.5
130
95
75
231
254
Double
240
231
255.5
91.5
272
360
6100/6200
STANDARD 6100 FOOTSWITCHES
For valves
Standard
13 21 13 21 13 23 31 41
Double 7
Simple
Large
14 22 14 22 14 24 32 42
X X 1 PF04612100
X X 2 PF04612200
X X 3 PF04612300
X X 1 PF04612500
X X 1 PF04612600
X X 1 1 PF04612700
X X 2 PF04612800
Plastic
X X 2 PF04613100
X X 4 PF04613200
X X 2 PF04613300
X X 2 PF04613400
X X 4 PF04613500
X X X PF04814100
X X X PF04814600
X X 1 PF04615100
X X 2 PF04615200
X X 3 PF04615300
X X 1 PF04615500
X X 1 PF04615600
X X 1 1 PF04615700
X X 2 PF04615800
X X 2 PF04616100
X X 4 PF04616200
X X 2 PF04616300
X X 2 PF04616400
X X 4 PF04616500
Aluminium
X X 1 PF04617100
X X 2 PF04617200
X X 3 PF04617300
X X 1 PF04617500
X X 1 PF04617600
X X 1 1 PF04617700
X X 2 PF04617800
X X 2 PF04618100
X X 4 PF04618200
X X 2 PF04618300
X X 2 PF04618400
X X 4 PF04618500
361
6100/6200
7
14 22 14 22 14 24 32 42
X 1 PF18620010
X 2 PF18620025
X 1 PF18620037
X 1 PF18620050
X 2 PF18620053
X 4 PF18620054
X 2 PF18620055
X 2 PF18620056
A1
A1
362
6100/6200
6200 FOOTSWITCH - ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
COMPONENTS
Switches
13 21
13 23 31 41
363
6100/6200
6200 Double
Instructions
Protection for 6100 footswitch* - Tick the box corresponding to the type of footswitch required.
- Tick the boxes corresponding to the type of protection
Standard aluminium required (only for 6100 footswitch).
- Write the number and type of switches required (max. 3 snap
Large aluminium action switches and max. 2 slow action switches). It is not
possible to assemble both snap and slow action switches
Large plastic
on the same footswitch.
- Tick the box corresponding to the type of pedal required.
* 6200 footswitch is always equipped with standard plastic protection.
Switches
1NO+1NC snap action
Remarks
03092018
364
OMICRON
OMICRON
Footswitch 7
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions (not • Available in different conigurations featuring various
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
available for mini-footswitch conigurations). operation modes, cover color (grey, yellow or red) and
• Mechanical life of switches: up to max. 30 million switches.
operations. • Available in ive different lever operation modes: with free
• IP protection degree: footswitch Omicron is classiied IP40 movement, with lever locked in neutral position or latched
(mini-footswitch coniguration) and IP65. in low position, with free movement featuring two-stage
• Extreme temperature resistance: from -25°C to +70°C. actuating force, and with lever locked in neutral position with
• Salt mist resistant. two-stage actuating force.
• Base, cover and pedal made of shock resistant ABS material • Single or double footswitches and mini-footswitches
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
365
OMICRON
POSSIBLE ASSEMBLIES
Omicron footswitch with red aluminium cover Omicron mini-footswitch with grey cover
CERTIFICATIONS
Mini-footswitch C
Markings and homologations
Footswitch with cover C U (pending)
366
OMICRON
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Scheme
1 14 22
127
101 75
35
19.5
2°...4°
15.5
140
280
138
85
12°a
17.5°b
51.5
35
367
OMICRON
D3 Cover color
1 = yellow
2 = grey
7 3 = black
4 = red
Base color
1 = grey
2 = black
Instructions
Write into the boxes the numbers corresponding to the characteristics required and obtain the footswitch code (see example).
D3 2 1
D 2
Devices
1 = free movement of the lever (There is no particular device
preventing the lever from being actuated freely). Switches
2 = lever moving after unlocking the safety device (The 1 = 1 NO+NC snap action switch
pedal can be actuated only after disactivating the 2 = 1 NO+NC slow action switch
mechanical safety device, afer fully inserting the foot, 3 = 2 NO+NC snap action switches
thus preventing any accidental actuation). 4 = 2 NO+NC slow action switches
3 = latching device to maintain the lever in lowered position
(By lowering the lever the contacts are switched on, the
lever remains locked and the contacts activated).
4 = free movement of the lever with two-stage actuating
force (By applying a light pressure on the lever, the irst Cover color
contact will be activated while the second one remains 1 = yellow
disactivated. A greater pressure on the lever will switch 2 = grey
on also the second contact). 3 = yellow + grey (double footswitch)
5 = lever moving after unlocking the safety device with 4 = red
two-stage actuating force (Same as above, but the pedal 5 = red half cover
can be actuated only by completely inserting the foot to 7 = yellow half cover
disactivate the mechanical safety device). 8 = grey half cover
Instructions
Write into the boxes the numbers corresponding to the characteristics required and obtain the footswitch code (see example).
V0
03092018
D 1 2 2 4 1
368
OMICRON
REMARKS
369
370
ELECTRONIC DEVICES 8
371
372
PANDIA
PANDIA
Cable transducer 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Available with lockable vents and water drain holes. • Available in two versions with measuring wire ranging up to
• 4 function keys for set up. 3 m or 5 m.
• IP protection degree: Pandia is classiied IP65, IP67, IP69K. • Available with 4-20 mA analogue interface with cable
• Extreme temperature resistance: from -25°C to +80°C. clamp, or SSI digital interface with connector, or CAN with
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Featuring a sturdy case in technopolymer and equipped connector.
with a robust measuring wire (made of stainless steel), the • A redundant version with analogue or digital output is also
cable transducer Pandia guarantees an exceptionally long, available.
maintenance-free service life even in harsh conditions. • 4 conigurable relay outputs.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and • Different connector output positions available.
guarantee protections against water and dust.
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
• CE marking.
373
PANDIA
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -25°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 65, IP 67, IP 69K
3000 mm
Measuring range
5000 mm
Pull-out force 5.5 N max
Sensing method Magnetic
Max. speed 3 m/s
Weight 420 g
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
25.5
14.5
45
89 15
39
42
.2
Ø4
78
76
39
Ø4
.2
.2
Ø4
39
78
374
PANDIA
CABLE CLAMP OUTPUT POSITION (ANALOGUE INTERFACE)
nT
t1 T
T = 0.5...10 μs
Clock
t2 t2 ≤ 20 ± 2 μs
Data t1 = 0.25...5 μs
Bit 1 Bit 0
f max. = 2 MHz
MSB LSB
375
PANDIA
CONNECTION PIN-OUT
6 5 4 3 2 1
8
POS Relays Description
1 Relay 1 NO
2 Relay 1 COM
1 2 3
3 Relay 1 NC
4 Relay 2 NO
5 Relay 2 COM
1 2 3 4 5 6 6 Relay 2 NC
Redundant Pandia 15 mm
Instructions
Output
- Tick the box corresponding to the type of transducer required.
Analogue 4 - 20 mA - Tick the box corresponding to the type of output required.
- Tick the box corresponding to the wire measuring range
Digital SSI* required.
- Tick the box corresponding to the type of wire hooking ring
Digital CAN
required.
5000 mm
376
EGON
EGON
Analogue and digital encoder 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Egon is a magnetic angular sensor, which reads the shaft • Suitable for installation on Fox, Oscar and Top rotary limit
position within the range 0°… 360° and converts it into the switches to control multi-revolutions rotors.
corresponding analogue signal 4-20 mA. • Available with 4-20 mA analogue interface with cable clamp,
• The resulting analogue output acts as a traditional or with CANbus digital interface with connector.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
potentiometer, featuring immunity to interference, usage of • Available in conigurations with shaft or with contactless
long cables without causing instability, current or voltage magnet and bush.
calibrated output, possibility of changes of the power supply • High level of safety guaranteed by the double stage
without affecting the output signal and usage of the output redundant scheme.
as percentage on the revolution or as angle. • Featuring protection against input over-current and input
• Compact and flexible, it is designed for easy assembly and and output over-voltage.
wiring together with standard sets of cams, as an alternative • Available with clamping flange, interface female connector
to the use of potentiometric transducers. and adapter coupling (Ø 6-6, Ø 6-8, Ø 6-10).
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
377
EGON
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -25°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP65, IP67, IP69K (pending)
Rated rotation speed 800 rev./min
Maximum rotation speed 1500 rev./min
Egon-RS with shaft > 30x106 revolutions
Mechanical life
Egon-RS contactless ∞
Shaft diameter 6 mm
Male connector M8 4 PIN
Connections Cable
Cable with male connector M12 5 PIN
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
With shaft
Ø holes 1.8 mm 8
1.2
hole depth 8 mm
No.3 screws ISO7049-ST2.5
8
2
13.8
53.2
42.7
49
64.5
28
25.9
15.5
6
1.5
19
38
Ø54
1.2
Ø45
3.2 3.2
53.2
42.7
45
49
64.5
32
15.5
6
1.5
19
38
379
EGON
Contactless version
Ø holes 1.8 mm
hole depth 5.5 mm
No.3 screws ISO7049-ST2.5
8
8
13.8
A
53.2
42.7
34.5
17.5
57.3
7.8
0.8
17 19
SECTION A-A
38
A
Ø54
Ø45
3.2 3.2
A
53.2
42.7
34.5
38.5
21.5
57.3
0.8
4
3.8
SECTION A-A 19
A
38
380
EGON
EGON - REQUEST FORM FOR ENCODER
Type Flange
Non redundant with analogue output 4 - 20 mA
Version Ø 6-10
With shaft Ø6 mm
Contactless Instructions
- Tick the box corresponding to the tyoe of encoder required.
- Tick the box corresponding to the version required.
Connections
- Tick the box corresponding to connection reuired. When the
Male connector 4 PIN «cable» or «cable with connector» is required, write the length
of the cable (in meters)
Cable ATTENTION: The length must be an integer number.
- Tick the box if the flange is required.
Cable with male connector 5 PIN - Tick the preferred box if the adapter coupling is required.
Cable length
_________ meters
Remarks
381
EGON
REMARKS
8
03092018
382
EGON-RS
EGON-RS
Absolute encoder RS 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Egon-RS is a magnetic multiturn encoder, suitable for • Suitable for installation on Fox, Oscar and Top rotary limit
counting the shaft revolutions, working even without power switches to control multi-revolutions rotors.
supply through a battery backup, active when the encoder • Available in conigurations with shaft or with contactless
reads a shaft revolution. magnet and bush.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Compact and flexible, it is designed for easy assembly and • Featuring sturdy RS-485 differential Half-Duplex output
wiring together with standard sets of cams. suitable for transmitting through native protocol.
• Very low power consumption guarantees highest eficiency. • Featuring protection against input over-current and against
• Single turn measuring resolution guaranteed by 1024 over-voltage and reverse polarity.
points per revolution (10 bit version) or by 4096 points per • Available with clamping flange, interface female connector
revolution (12 bit version). and adapter coupling (Ø 6-6, Ø 6-8, Ø 6-10).
• IP protection degree: Egon-RS is classiied IP65, IP67 and
IP69K (pending).
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
383
EGON-RS
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -25°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP65, IP67, IP69K (pending)
Rated rotation speed 800 rev./min
Maximum rotation speed 1500 rev./min
Egon-RS with shaft > 30x106 revolutions
Mechanical life
Egon-RS contactless ∞
Shaft diameter 6 mm
Male connector M8 4 PIN
Connections Cable
Cable with male connector M12 5 PIN
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
With shaft
Ø holes 1.8 mm 8
1.2
hole depth 8 mm
No.3 srcrews ISO7049-ST2.5
8
2
13.8
53.2
42.7
49
64.5
28
25.9
15.5
6
1.5
19
38
Ø54
1.2
Ø45
3.2 3.2
53.2
42.7
45
49
64.5
32
15.5
6
1.5
19
38
385
EGON-RS
Contactless version
Ø holes 1.8 mm
hole depth 8 mm
No.3 screws ISO7049-ST2.5
8
8
13.8
A
53.2
42.7
34.5
17.5
57.3
7.8
0.8
17 19
SECTION A-A
38
A
Ø54
Ø45
3.2 3.2
A
53.2
42.7
34.5
38.5
21.5
57.3
0.8
4
3.8
SECTION A-A 19
A
38
386
EGON-RS
EGON-RS - REQUEST FORM FOR ABSOLUTE ENCODER RS
Version Flange
With shaft Ø6 mm
Ø 6-6 8
Connections Ø 6-8
Male connector 4 PIN
Ø 6-10
Cable
Remarks
387
EGON-RS
REMARKS
8
03092018
388
YANKEE
YANKEE
Absolute encoder 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Used in a variety of industrial sectors, from hoisting to • Suitable for installation on Fox, Oscar and Top rotary limit
automation, to meet any need in terms of registration and switches to control multi-revolutions rotors.
identiication of modern production machines, wherever • Every position of the shaft is associated with an analogue
controls are needed, regardless of the nature of the signal in voltage, in current or PWM.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
mechanic system and of its complexity, and whenever
reducing and unifying the system of angular positioning
sensors is necessary.
CERTIFICATIONS
• Designed for easy assembly and wiring together with
• CE marking, cULus marking.
standard sets of cams.
• Measuring accuracy guaranteed by 4096 points per
revolution.
• IP protection degree: Yankee is classiied IP20.
• Extreme temperature resistance: from -40°C to +80°C.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
389
YANKEE
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -40°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -40°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 20
Free rotation 360°
Max. rotation speed 800 rpm
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
19
19.1
Ch 1
26
43.3 2 CW
e w
scr
19
ing
18.
Ø10
app
2
f-t
55.9
sel
3.5
or
ew
scr
M3
0.9
4.5
03092018
STANDARD ENCODERS
Description Code
Yankee - current output PA01AA01
Yankee - voltage output PA01AB01
Yankee - PWM output PA01AC01
390
ATLANTE
ATLANTE
Electronic limit switch 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Used in a variety of industrial sectors, from lifting to • Equipped with flange or, on request, with pinion gear and
automation. Designed to record absolute positions regardless flange mounted on the side.
of the mechanic of the system and of its complexity.
• Featuring integrated SSI interface.
• Designed for easy wiring. CERTIFICATIONS
• Accuracy guaranteed by 1024 points per revolution.
• IP protection degree: Atlante is classiied IP65, IP67 and • CE marking.
• Complying with accident prevention regulation BGV C 1 (only
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
IP69K.
• Extreme temperature resistance: from -25°C to +80°C. for Germany).
• Made with high quality materials and components to
guarantee long mechanical life, precision and repeat accuracy
even in extreme conditions.
391
ATLANTE
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -25°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 65, IP67, IP69K
Insulation category Class II
Maximum rotation speed 6000 rpm
Connections Male connector 8 PIN M12
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Number of PINs 8
Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ
Maximum voltage 0.8 kV
Wires 24 - 20 AWG
Contacts CuZn
Mating Connector, 8 PIN, female connector M12, A-coded (Phoenix Contact 1513347)
392
ATLANTE
MALE CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENT
nT
t1 T
T = 0.5...10 μs
Clock
t2 t2 ≤ 20 ± 2 μs
Data t1 = 0.25...5 μs
Bit 1 Bit 0
f max. = 2 MHz
MSB LSB
A
44
View from A
Ø6
.2
Ø4
7
74.6
75.2
12
109
37.6
22,8
55.5
30 8
.5
49 118
30.5
194
147 75.2
126 47.6
109
View from B
84 67
118
Ø6
.2
167.3
43.9
74.6
10
35.7
37.3
30
.5
5
30.
24.4
B
7
Ø4
12
393
ATLANTE
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1
A2
A3
COMPONENTS
Accessories
394
ATLANTE EVO
ATLANTE EVO
Electronic limit switch 8
FEATURES OPTIONS
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Atlante Evo is an high resolution multi-turn absolute magnetic • It is fully compatible and it can be integrated in systems
encoder (28 bit overall resolution), equipped with SoftCAM mounting rotary limit switch Fox.
module, emulating up to 6 cams. • Equipped with 6 conigurable relays 60/250 V, 3/10 A, NC or
• Coniguration through PC interface. NO, two of which with safety function.
• Single turn measuring resolution guaranteed by 4096 points • Featuring Bus standard RS-485 output.
per revolution (12 bit) with accuracy lower than +/- 0,35°. • Featuring protection against polarity reversal and short
• Multiturn resolution: 16 bit (65535 revolutions). circuit.
• IP protection degree: Atlante Evo is classiied IP65 and IP67. • Dedicated cable clamps or connectors.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
• Extreme temperature resistance: from -25°C to +80°C. • Available with flanges, pinion gears and couplings.
• Featuring technopolymer housing (nylon fyber-glass) and • Plates with universal adapters to replace existing systems.
non-magnetic stainless steel AISI 303 shaft.
• High quality materials and components guarantee long
mechanical life, precision and repeat accuracy even in
CERTIFICATIONS
extreme conditions.
• CE marking.
• Complying with accident prevention regulation BGV C1 (only
for Germany).
395
ATLANTE EVO
CERTIFICATIONS
Storage -25°C/+80°C
Ambient temperature
Operational -25°C/+80°C
IP protection degree IP 65, IP67
Insulation category Class II
Maximum rotation speed 1500 rpm
2 cable clamps M20
Connections
Male connector M12 8 PIN
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Number of PINs 8
Insulation resistance 500 V
Maximum voltage 24 V
396
ATLANTE EVO
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
92.5
8
38.1
39.2
69.7
56.2
18.1
5.5
9
48 75.5
137.4
100 69.4
78
90
8.5
54
17
12
12
16 16
35.4 102
6
69.7
Type
With 4 relays emulating cam functions.
Remarks
397
ATLANTE EVO
REMARKS
8
03092018
398
399
3
8
ATLANTE EVO
400
ATEX SERIES 9
401
402
LIMITEX AG
LIMITEX AG
HAZARDOUS AREAS
Rotary limit switch 9
FEATURES OPTIONS
• It consists of a gear motor that transfers movement to the • Revolution ratios from 1:15 to 1:499, achieved by combining
cams through a primary input reduction stage (worm gear different secondary output stages.
and helical toothed gear) and one or more secondary output • Snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts.
stages (pairs of straight toothed gears). • It can be equipped with a cam set with 2, 3 or 4 switches.
• Accurate adjustment of cams by means of screws. • Available with flange for direct coupling to the motor.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • Available with direct control switches to enable direct action
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. on the motor.
• IP protection degree: Limitex AG is classiied IP66.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -50°C to +60°C.
• It features external enclosure made of G20 cast iron,
CERTIFICATIONS
stainless steel transmission and gear driving shafts, self-
• CE marking.
lubricating technopolymer gears and driving bushes.
• Atex certiication EN 60079-0:2009, EN 60079-1:2007,
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
EN 60079-31:2009.
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
• Conformity to Standards IECEx IEC 60079-0:2011,
IEC 60079-1:2007-04 and IEC 60079-31:2008.
403
LIMITEX AG
CERTIFICATIONS
* The user is responsible for choosing the proper protection type, group and maximum case temperature of the limit switch to be installed. The user is also responsible for the correct installation,
connection to the electrical network and use and maintenance of all electrical devices.
404
LIMITEX AG
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
1NO+1NC
Contacts (All NC contacts are of the positive 1NO+1NC
opening operation type )
12 14
Scheme
11
Ø126 M20
57
111
25 24.5
49.5
25
136.5
52.5 72.5
211.76
63 83
39.2
Ø7
Ø7
Ø15h9
114.4
98.4
146
59.2
Ø7
Ø7
67.2 136.5
152.5
405
LIMITEX AG
ASSEMBLY DRAWING
A1 A2 A3
PRSL0003XX
PRSL0011XX
Refer to the following table for descriptions of components: “Standard cam sets”.
406
LIMITEX AG
COMPONENTS
Ref. Drawing No. and type of cams No. and type of switches Code
407
LIMITEX AG
Revolution ratio 3
11 11
1:15 1:75
1:20 1:100
1:25 1:150
1:50 1:
Cable entry 4
Remarks
03092018
Manufactured by COEL Motori srl – Distributed by TER Tecno Elettrica Ravasi srl
408
LIMITEX AP
LIMITEX AP
HAZARDOUS AREAS
Position limit switch 9
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Positive opening NC contacts for safety functions. • 2 or 4 snap action switches with 1NO+1NC contacts.
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. • Cross rods with 3 or 4 maintained positions every 90°.
• Operation frequency: 3600 operations/hour max. • Modular adapter with ixing points.
• IP protection degree: Limitex AP is classiied IP66.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -50°C to +60°C.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
• It features rugged external enclosure made of G20 cast
CERTIFICATIONS
iron and cross rod support made of zinc alloy. Internal
• CE marking.
components are made of materials which guarantee long
• Atex certiication EN 60079-0:2009, EN 60079-1:2007,
mechanical life and continuous performance.
EN 60079-31:2009.
• All materials and components used are wear resistant and
• Conformity to Standards IECEx IEC 60079-0:2011,
guarantee protection of the unit against water and dust.
IEC 60079-1:2007-04 and IEC 60079-31:2008.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
409
LIMITEX AP
CERTIFICATIONS
* The user is responsible for choosing the proper protection type, group and maximum case temperature of the limit switch to be installed. The user is also responsible for the correct installation,
connection to the electrical network and use and maintenance of all electrical devices.
410
LIMITEX AP
LIMITEX AP WITH 2 SWITCHES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF THE SWITCHES
Utilisation category AC 15
Rated operational current 3A
Rated operational voltage 250 Vac
Rated thermal current 10 A 9
Rated insulation voltage 300 Vac
Mechanical life 1x106 operations
Connections Screw-type terminals
Scheme
14 22
30°
Actuating point 93 mm
Actuating point 76 mm
Actuating point 60 mm
150 mm rod
100 mm rod
125 mm rod
200 mm
250 mm
300 mm
Rod length
411
LIMITEX AP
Scheme
14 22
0 - Reset position
0
A - Angle for switch operation: 65°
1 - Maximum operation angle to the left: 90°
2 - Maximum operation angle to the right: 90°
A A
The limit switch rods have no rotation limit stop (they can rotate free
around 360°).
1 2
412
LIMITEX AP
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
122.9
107.9
97
57 8.5
157 103
51.5 133
1/2 NPT-M20-M25
Ø6.5
Ø11
0
108
1/2 NPT-M20-M25
91 20.5 100
413
LIMITEX AP
Standard limit switches are equipped with 200 mm rods and 1NO+1NC snap action switches .
14 22
Standard limit switches are equipped with 200 mm rods and 1NO+1NC snap action switches .
14 22
EX26755100
03092018
EX26755200
Manufactured by COEL Motori srl – Distributed by TER Tecno Elettrica Ravasi srl
414
MIKE-X
MIKE-X
HAZARDOUS AREAS
Pendant control station 9
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Pendant control station for use in industrial areas and • Available in conigurations from 4 to 16 actuators.
hazardous locations for ATEX and IECEx zones 1, 2, 21, 22. • 2 speed switches with NO contacts or 1 speed switches with
• Reduced installation and wiring time and costs: the NC contacts.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
optimized internal space enables easy and quick wiring. • Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
• IP protection degree: Mike-X is classiied IP65. opposite functions.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -20°C to +60°C. • Connecting bridges to reduce wiring time.
• It features solid but light weight body made of powder epoxy • It can be equipped with thermal protectors and resistances
painted aluminum or stainless steel AISI 316 (optional), as anti-condensation heaters (max. power 24W).
resistant to temperature changes.
• All materials and components used are shock and wear
resistant and guarantee protection of the unit against water,
CERTIFICATIONS
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
415
MIKE-X
CERTIFICATIONS
Scheme
14 24 12
OPTIONAL
Anti-condensation heater
Stainless steel AISI 316 version
416
MIKE-X
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
Simple
9
129
107
Double 107
129
254 107
417
MIKE-X
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
ATEX II 2 G Ex db IIC T6 Gb
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
or or
II 2 D Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db Start button Start button
IECEx Ex db IIC T6 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db
9 Tick the box to accept the type of protection provided Emergency stop Emergency stop
pushbutton
pushbutton
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
4 - 8 actuators: simple control station
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
12 - 16 actuators: double control station
1 5 9 13 17 21
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
YELLOW
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
2 6 10 14 18
GREEN
3 7 11 15 19
4 8 12 16 20
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
Cable entry
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
M25 x 1,5 M32 x 1,5
Optional
Anti-condensation heater
ATTENTION:
FIRST SECOND
SPEED SPEED all pushbuttons are
equipped with 2 speed
WHITE SIDE
13 23 13 23
BLACK SIDE
418
SPA EXPLOSION
PROOF
SPA EXPLOSION PROOF
HAZARDOUS AREAS
Pendant control station 9
FEATURES OPTIONS
• Enclosures with actuators placed on a double row to enable • Available in conigurations from 2 to 12 actuators, arranged
grouping of a large number of functions in a single control. on a double row.
• The emergency stop mushroom pushbutton complies with • 1 or 2 speed switches with NO or NC contacts.
The data and the products illustrated in this brochure may be modiied without notice. Under no
standard EN418. • Mechanical interlock to prevent simultaneous operation of
• Mechanical life of switches: 1 million operations. opposite functions.
• IP protection degree: SPA Explosion Proof is classiied IP66.
• Extreme temperature resistance: -50°C to +55°C.
• It features solid but light weight body made of aluminum, or
CERTIFICATIONS
stainless steel AISI 316 or chrome-plated cast-iron (optional
• CE marking.
versions), resistant to temperature changes and corrosive
• Atex certiication EN 60079-0: 2012+A1: 2013, EN 60079-1
environments.
Ed.7: 2014, EN 60079-31:2014.
circumstances can their description have a contractual value.
419
PROOF
SPA EXPLOSION
CERTIFICATIONS
Conformity to Atex Standards EN 60079-1 Ed.7 :2014 Explosive atmospheres - Equipment protection by lameproof enclosures ‘d’
13 21 33 13 21 11 83 73
14 22 34 14 22 12 84 74
Scheme 43 51 63 33 43 51 61 11 21 43 33
44 52 64 34 44 52 62 12 22 44 34
420
SPA EXPLOSION
PROOF
OVERALL DIMENSIONS (mm)
2 - 8 actuators
M32 x 1.5
320
135 99
10 - 12 actuators
M32 x 1.5
424
135 99
421
PROOF
SPA EXPLOSION
Protection
Tick the box to choose the type of protection required.
Ex II 2 G II 2 D
Ex d IIB T6 Gb or Ex d IIC T6 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db IP66
9 Enclosure group II B
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
Ex II 2 G II 2 D
Ex d IIB T6 Gb or Ex d IIC T6 Gb
Ex tb IIIC T85°C Db IP66
Enclosure group II C
Control elements
1 4 7 9
RED WHITE
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
2 5 8
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
YELLOW
3 ON / OFF
LIGHTS
6 9
Options
Enclosure in stainless steel AISI 316
Opposite functions
Opposite functions
vertically coupled
vertically coupled
Instructions
- Choose the type of protection required by ticking the
correspondent box.
- Fill in the control station scheme for the number of
control elements required (2, 4, 6, 8, 10 or 12 actuators).
- Write the number corresponding to the control element
required (broken line box). When buttons are required
mark the direction of the arrow into the corresponding
box.
- Attention: opposite functions (eg.: up – down) are
vertically coupled in columns.
When one funcion is the emergency stop mushroom
pushbutton, then the opposite switch/function is not
used.
- Tick the box corresponding to the optional required.
Remarks
03092018
422
APPENDIX - REGULATIONS
In the modern industrial sector, safety is an issue of fundamental importance and relevance for companies all over the
world.
Technological progress and the growing level of production automation make it necessary to devote more space and
greater importance to the legal aspects of safety and its technical and legal implications.
To give substance to the focus on safety, TER designs and makes its products to comply with all the directives,
requirements, recommendations and laws applicable in the industry and systematically subjects them to accurate,
in-depth lab tests to check their conformity.
423
EN 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear EN 418
- Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and Standard EN 418 concern Safety of Machinery and
fuse-combination units functional aspects. The Standard sets out principles for
Part 3 of Standard 60947 applies to switches, the design of emergency stop devices on machines.
disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-
combination units to be used in distribution circuits and ISO 13850 Safety of Machinery - Emergency stop -
motor circuits of which the rated voltage does not exceed
Principles for design
1000 V for alternating current or 1500 V for direct current.
The Standard speciies functional requirements and
The Standard does not apply to equipment coming within
design principles for the emergency stop function on
the scope of EN/IEC 60947-2, EN/IEC 60947-4-1 and
machinery, independent of the type of energy used.
EN/IEC 60947-5-1; however, when switches and fuse-
combination units coming into the scope of this Standard
are normally used to start, accelerate and/or stop an Regulation for prevention of injury BGV C 1 (only for
individual motor they shall also comply with the additional Germany)
requirements given in Annex A. The requirements for
single-pole-operated three-pole switches are included in The Regulation describes how the protection objectives
Annex C. Auxiliary switches itted to equipment within the set out by the accident prevention standards can be
scope of this Standard shall comply with the requirements achieved. This regulation does not exclude other equally
of EN/IEC 60947-5-1. safe solutions, required by other member states of the
European Union.
424
Test
Mechanical duration test Second
Description
The test checks the eficiency of a component during digit
operation and under given conditions of use. 0 Non protected
Protected against access to hazardous parts with a tool The access probe of 1.0 mm ø shall not penetrate
3 and no ingress of dust. Ingress of water in quantities
and against solid foreign objects of 2.,5 mm ø and greater
causing harmful effects shall not be possible when
Protected against access to hazardous parts with a wire IP68 the enclosure is continuously immersed in water
4 under conditions which shall be agreed between
and against solid foreign objects of 1 mm ø and greater
manufacturer and user but which are more severe
Protected against access to hazardous parts with a than for numeral 7.
5
wire and dust-protected
The access probe of 1.0 mm ø shall not penetrate and
Protected against access to hazardous parts with a wire IP69 - K no ingress of dust. Protection against high-pressure,
6
and dust-tight high-temperature water jets.
425
IK Code protection degree H.A.L.T. “HIGHLY ACCELERATED LIFE TEST”
Standard 62262 describes a system (IK code) for HALT is a ruggedness margin discovery process, which
classifying the degrees of protection provided by reveals the main causes of product failures.
enclosures for electrical equipment against external
During the test, the product is subjected to gradually
mechanical impacts (rated voltage of the protected
higher stress levels brought on by vibration and by
equipment not exceeding 72.5 kV).
rapid temperature and humidity transitions with the aim
of uncovering the main causes of failure and the real
Code IK E (J)
operating limits of the product.
The HALT process subjects the product to stresses well
00 Non protected
beyond the expected operating conditions, until broken
01 0.14 or jammed.
02 0.2
03 0.35
04 0.5
05 0.7
06 1
07 2
08 5
09 10
10 20
Short-circuit test
The test is designed to check the resistance of a device
to given short-circuit conditions.
426
Special regulations for potentially
explosive areas
Deinition of potentially explosive areas Equipment classiication
Hazardous areas are places where, under certain European directive ATEX 94/9/EC divides equipment
conditions, explosive atmospheres may form. An into three categories, with different levels of protection,
explosive atmosphere is a mixture of air and gases, depending on the level of protection ensured.
vapours, fumes or combustible dust, whose combustion
spreads rapidly (explosion) after ignition at atmospheric
pressure. MINING SURFACE
LEVEL
Users are responsible for carrying out a classiication OF PROTECTION
of hazardous areas, as set out in European Directive ensured by GAS (POWER)
the equipment Category Category FUEL
1999/92/EC. International standards IEC 61241-10 Category
provide criteria for the classiication of hazardous
areas depending on their chemical nature, physical Very high M1 1G 1D
characteristics and quantity of substances used, as well
as on the frequency and length of time when an explosive
mixture may occur. High M2 2G 2D
Explosive atmosphere
Zone 2 Zone 21 LIKELY
Explosive atmosphere
Zone 3 Zone 22 NOT LIKELY
427
Ignition Maximum surface Temperature for atmospheres with combustible dusts
temperature of temperature of the electrical
the explosive Temperature equipment with 40°C ambient When providing protection against flammable dusts,
mixture class temperature whether in the form of dust cloud or dust layer, their
[°C] [°C] [°F] ignition temperature must be taken into account. The
surface temperature of the enclosure, indicated on the
More than 450 T1 450 842 motor plate, must be below that of the reference ignition
From 300 to 450 T2 300 572
temperature.
The reference temperature is the lowest of the two
From 200 to 300 T3 200 392 values calculated as follows:
From 135 to 200 T4 130 275 TS1 = 2/3 Tcl
From 100 to 135 T5 100 212 (Tcl = ignition temperature of the dust cloud)
I
Acetaldehyde
IIA Ether
Ethyl nitrate
IIC Carbon disulphide
428
Selecting safety electrical equipment in the presence ATEX reference standards
of gases and in the presence of combustible dusts
The connection between hazardous zones and the INERIS 13ATEX0020X certiicate
category of the equipment to be used is deined by EN 60079-0: 2009 Electrical apparatus for potentially
Directive 1999/92/EC. The speciic construction explosive areas.General rules.
standards for modes of protection (e.g. Ex d) also deine
the category obtained when they are applied (e.g. 2G). EN 60079-1: 2007 Electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive areas. “d” explosion-proof enclosures.
EN 60079-3: 2009 Equipment protected by “t” enclosures
Protection for use in the presence of combustible dusts.
Explosive Hazardous provided Motor Mode of
Atmosphere Zone by the category protection
equipment
IECEx INE 13.0051X certiicate
Continuous 0 Very high 1G IEC EN 60079-26
IEC 60079-0: 2011 Electrical apparatus for potentially
Ex d explosive areas. General rules.
Likely 1 High 2G Ex de
Ex e IEC 60079-1: 2007-04 Electrical apparatus for potentially
explosive areas. “d” explosion-proof enclosures.
Unlikely 2 Normal 3G Ex nA
IEC 60079-31: 2008 Equipment protected by “t” enclosures
for use in the presence of combustible dusts.
Protection
Explosive Hazardous provided Motor Mode of
Atmosphere Zone by the category protection
equipment
Currently not
Continuous 20 Very high 1D
envisaged
22
Unlikely Conductive Normal 3D Ex tD - A21 - IP6x
dusts
22 Non-
Unlikely conductive Normal 3D Ex tD - A22 - IP5x
dusts
429
430
03092018
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, con-
sectetur adipiscing elit. Duis mi
dui, pellentesque id bibendum
quis, pulvinar euismod augue.
Ut suscipit sodales aliquam.
Sed in nulla ligula. Donec iaculis
mauris elit.
XXXXXXXXXXXXX
Nulla suscipit massa vel semper
ornare. Phasellus interdum nec
orci at vestibulum. Cras euismod
mauris non ultrices fermentum.
Vestibulum sagittis pellentesque
tincidunt.
www.ter.IT